WO2017077979A1 - User device, base station, and connection establishment method - Google Patents

User device, base station, and connection establishment method Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2017077979A1
WO2017077979A1 PCT/JP2016/082273 JP2016082273W WO2017077979A1 WO 2017077979 A1 WO2017077979 A1 WO 2017077979A1 JP 2016082273 W JP2016082273 W JP 2016082273W WO 2017077979 A1 WO2017077979 A1 WO 2017077979A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
context
base station
enb
connection
user apparatus
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/JP2016/082273
Other languages
French (fr)
Japanese (ja)
Inventor
高橋 秀明
ウリ アンダルマワンティ ハプサリ
Original Assignee
株式会社Nttドコモ
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Priority claimed from JP2016165170A external-priority patent/JP6123009B1/en
Application filed by 株式会社Nttドコモ filed Critical 株式会社Nttドコモ
Priority to US15/544,566 priority Critical patent/US10448290B2/en
Priority to EP16862039.1A priority patent/EP3373692B1/en
Priority to CN201680011221.6A priority patent/CN107251642B/en
Publication of WO2017077979A1 publication Critical patent/WO2017077979A1/en
Priority to PH12017501236A priority patent/PH12017501236A1/en

Links

Images

Classifications

    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04WWIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W76/00Connection management
    • H04W76/10Connection setup
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04WWIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W92/00Interfaces specially adapted for wireless communication networks
    • H04W92/04Interfaces between hierarchically different network devices
    • H04W92/10Interfaces between hierarchically different network devices between terminal device and access point, i.e. wireless air interface

Definitions

  • the present invention relates to a technology in which each of the user equipment UE and the base station eNB in the mobile communication system holds a UE context.
  • a connection state between a user apparatus UE (hereinafter referred to as UE) and a base station eNB (hereinafter referred to as eNB) is an RRC (Radio Resource Control) idle state (RRC_Idle) and an RRC connection state. (RRC_Connected).
  • RRC Radio Resource Control
  • a UE context is generated by MME (Mobility Management Entity) on the core NW side, and in the RRC connection state, the UE context is held in the eNB and the UE to which the UE is connected.
  • the UE context is information including bearer related information, security related information, and the like.
  • Non-Patent Document 1 when the UE transitions from the RRC connected state to the RRC idle state, signaling as shown in FIG. 1 occurs (Non-Patent Document 1, etc.).
  • the case of FIG. 1 is a case where the eNB 2 detects that the communication of the UE 1 does not occur for a predetermined time, disconnects the connection with the UE 1, and transitions to the RRC idle state.
  • eNB 2 transmits a UE context release request (UE ⁇ Context Release Request) to MME 3 (step 1).
  • the MME 3 transmits a bearer release request (Release Access Bearers request) to the S-GW 4 (step 2), and the S-GW 4 returns a bearer release response (Release Access Bearers response) to the MME 3 (step 3).
  • the MME 3 transmits a UE context release instruction (UE Context Release Command) to the eNB 2 (step 4).
  • eNB2 transmits RRC connection release (RRC Connection Release) to UE1 (step 5), causes UE1 to release the UE context, and transitions to the RRC idle state.
  • eNB2 releases UE context and transmits UE context release completion (UE
  • 3GPP TS 36.413 V12.4.0 (2014-12) 3GPP TSG RAN Meeting # 66 RP-142030 Maui, USA, 8th-11th December 2014 3GPP TS 36.331 V12.6.0 (2015-06) 3GPP TS 36.321 V12.7.0 (2015-09) 3GPP TR.23.720 V1.2.0 (2015-11)
  • Non-Patent Document 2 An example of a procedure conceivable in the method will be described with reference to FIG.
  • UE1 In the state shown in FIG. 2A, UE1 is in the RRC connection state, and the S1-C connection and the S1-U connection (S1-C / U in the figure) related to the UE1 are established on the core NW side. It is a state that has been.
  • the S1-C connection is an S1 connection that sends a C-plane signal
  • the S1-U connection is an S1 connection that passes a U-plane.
  • UE1 is transitioned to the RRC idle state by RRC connection release (RRC Connection Release).
  • RRC connection release RRC Connection Release
  • the UE context for UE1 in eNB2 is maintained
  • the UE context for eNB2 in UE1 is also maintained
  • the S1-C / U connection for UE1 is also maintained.
  • eNB2 and UE1 reuse the UE context that has been retained, thereby reducing signaling and establishing an RRC connection. .
  • UE1 and eNB2 show examples in which RRC connection establishment is performed using the retained UE contexts. There are a large number of UEs, and the eNB does not know whether each UE has a UE context that can be used for connection with the eNB.
  • the eNB_A holds the UE context that the UE 6 can use for the connection with the eNB_A. It is unclear whether or not
  • the eNB_A may attempt a connection procedure that reuses the UE context, assuming that all UEs located in the cell of the eNB_A hold the UE context for the eNB_A. Conceivable. However, in this case, the connection procedure with the UE that does not hold the UE context for eNB_A fails, and the normal connection procedure that does not reuse the UE context is executed again, which may cause a delay.
  • the present invention has been made in view of the above points.
  • the user apparatus In a mobile communication system that supports a function of establishing a connection by reusing context information held in each of a user apparatus and a base station, the user apparatus has a context. It is an object of the present invention to provide a technique that enables a base station to determine whether or not information is held.
  • the user apparatus in a mobile communication system supporting a function of establishing a connection by reusing context information held in each of the user apparatus and the base station, Transmitting means for transmitting to the base station a first message indicating that the user apparatus holds user apparatus side context information; Receiving means for receiving, from the base station, a second message indicating that the base station holds the base station side context information associated with the user apparatus; After receiving the second message, there is provided a user apparatus comprising: connection means for establishing a connection with the base station using the user apparatus side context information.
  • the base station in the mobile communication system that supports a function of establishing a connection by reusing context information held in each of the user apparatus and the base station,
  • Receiving means for receiving, from the user device, a first message indicating that the user device holds user device-side context information;
  • a second message indicating that the base station holds the base station side context information associated with the user apparatus is transmitted to the user apparatus.
  • a transmission means After transmitting the second message, there is provided a base station comprising connection means for establishing a connection with the user apparatus using the base station side context information.
  • connection establishment performed by the user apparatus in a mobile communication system that supports a function of establishing connection by reusing context information held in each of the user apparatus and the base station.
  • a method A transmission step of transmitting to the base station a first message indicating that the user apparatus holds user apparatus side context information; A receiving step of receiving, from the base station, a second message indicating that the base station holds the base station side context information associated with the user device; After receiving the second message, there is provided a connection establishment method comprising: a connection step of establishing a connection with the base station using the user apparatus side context information.
  • connection establishment performed by the base station in a mobile communication system that supports a function of establishing connection by reusing context information held in each of the user apparatus and the base station
  • a second message indicating that the base station holds the base station side context information associated with the user apparatus is transmitted to the user apparatus.
  • a connection establishment method comprising: a connection step of establishing a connection with the user apparatus using the base station side context information.
  • the user apparatus in a mobile communication system that supports a function of establishing a connection by reusing context information held in each of a user apparatus and a base station, holds the context information.
  • the context information There is provided a technique that enables a base station to determine whether or not there is.
  • LTE Long Term Evolution
  • Rel release
  • FIG. 4 is a diagram showing a configuration example of a communication system in the embodiment of the present invention.
  • the communication system according to the present embodiment includes an eNB 10, an eNB 20, an MME 30, an S-GW (Serving Gateway) 40, and a UE 50.
  • FIG. 4 shows only the part related to the present embodiment regarding the core network (EPC).
  • EPC core network
  • the UE 50 is a user device such as a mobile phone.
  • Each of the eNBs 10 and 20 is a base station.
  • the MME 30 is a node device that accommodates the eNB and performs location control, mobility control such as paging and handover, bearer establishment / deletion, and the like.
  • the S-GW 40 is a node device that relays user data (U-Plane data).
  • a system composed of the MME 30 and the S-GW 40 is called a communication control device.
  • the MME 30 and the S-GW 40 may be configured as a single device and referred to as a communication control device.
  • the MME 30 and the eNBs 10 and 20 are connected via the S1-MME interface, and the S-GW 40 and the eNBs 10 and 20 are connected via the S1-U interface.
  • a dotted connection line indicates a control signal interface, and a solid connection line indicates a user data transfer interface.
  • this method is a method that enables the number of signaling to be reduced.
  • the UE 50 is in an RRC connection state in the cell of the eNB 10 and an S1-C / U connection related to the UE 50 is established.
  • the S1-C connection includes a connection between the eNB 10 and the MME 30 and a connection between the MME 30 and the S-GW 40
  • the S1-U connection includes a connection between the eNB 10 and the S-GW 40.
  • Non-Patent Document 3 Before entering the description of the procedure in FIG. 5, an outline of an example of a procedure when the UE 50 first connects to the eNB 10 will be described (Non-Patent Document 3).
  • the eNB 10 transmits RRC ⁇ Connection Setup to the UE 50, sets the UE 50 to the RRC connection state, and receives RRC Connection Setup Complete from the UE 50.
  • the eNB 10 receives an Initial Context Setup Request from the MME 30, transmits an RRC Security Mode to the UE 50, receives an RRC Security Mode Complete from the UE 50, and transmits an RRC Connection Reconfiguration to the UE 50, RRC Connection Reconfiguration Complete is received from UE50, and InitialInContext Setup Response is transmitted to MME30.
  • the UE context and the UE context are established and held in the UE 50 and the eNB 10.
  • the eNB 10 transmits a connection maintenance instruction signal to the MME 30 (step 101). Also, the MME 30 transmits a connection maintenance instruction signal to the S-GW 40 (step 102).
  • the connection maintenance instruction signal is a signal that instructs the MME 30 to perform the paging by holding down the downlink data in the S-GW 40 when receiving the call to the UE 50 while maintaining the S1-C / U connection related to the UE 50.
  • the S-GW 40 that has received the connection maintenance instruction signal transmits a confirmation response indicating that the instruction has been confirmed to the MME 30 (step 103), and the MME 30 transmits a confirmation response to the eNB 10 (step 104).
  • connection maintenance instruction signal from the eNB 10 to the MME 30 regarding the UE 50 may be triggered by, for example, an event that causes the UE 50 to transition to the RRC idle state in the eNB 10, or the UE 50 is initially under the control of the eNB 10. It may be performed immediately after entering the RRC connection state and establishing the S1-C / U connection for the UE 50.
  • the event that causes the transition to the RRC idle state is, for example, when it is detected that communication with the UE 50 (uplink / downlink user data communication) does not occur for a certain period of time due to expiration of a predetermined timer (eg, UE : Inactivity Timer). However, it is not limited to this.
  • FIG. 5 assumes a case where it is triggered by detecting that communication with the UE 50 (uplink / downlink user data communication) does not occur for a certain period of time.
  • RRC connection release (RRC Connection Release) is transmitted to the UE 50, and the UE 50 is shifted to the RRC idle state (step 105).
  • the UE context established at the time of RRC connection is maintained in each of the UE 50 and the eNB 10.
  • downlink data for the UE 50 is generated, and the downlink data arrives at the S-GW 40 (step 106).
  • the S1-U connection has been established, but based on the connection maintenance instruction signal received in step 102, the S-GW 40 holds the downlink data in the buffer without transferring it to the eNB 10.
  • the S-GW 40 transmits a downlink data incoming notification to the MME 30 (step 107), and the MME 30 transmits an S1-AP paging signal for the UE 50 to the eNB 10 (step 108).
  • This paging itself is the same as the existing paging, and is transmitted to each eNB in the tracking area of the UE 50, but FIG. 5 shows transmission to the eNB 10.
  • the eNB 10 that has received the S1-AP paging signal transmits the RRC paging signal to the subordinate UE 50 (step 109).
  • the UE50 which received the RRC paging signal performs a RRC connection establishment procedure, and establishes a RRC connection (step 110). Thereafter, the eNB 10 transmits RRC connection establishment completion, which is a signal indicating that establishment of the RRC connection is completed, to the MME 30 (step 111).
  • the eNB 10 can determine that the RRC connection with the UE 50 has been established, for example, when the eNB 10 receives RRC Connection Setup Complete from the UE 50.
  • the MME 30 transmits an RRC connection establishment completion signal to the S-GW 40 (step 112).
  • the S-GW 40 determines that the RRC connection between the UE 50 and the eNB 10 has been established, and uses the S1-U connection related to the UE 50 that has already been established to transfer the pending downlink data to the eNB 10.
  • Start step 113.
  • the downlink data reaches the UE 50 from the eNB 10 (step 114). In this way, transmission of downlink data to the UE 50 is started.
  • RRC connection establishment procedure Details of the RRC connection establishment procedure in step 110 of FIG. 5 will be described later.
  • the UE context established and held at the time of RRC connection in each of the UE 50 and the eNB 10 is used. Therefore, RRC Security Mode Command, RRC Security Mode Complete, RRC connection establishment can be performed without transmitting / receiving messages such as RRC RConnection Reconfiguration and RRC Connection Reconfiguration Complete.
  • the UE context held in each of the UE 50 and the eNB 10 includes, for example, an RRC configuration (RRC configuration), a bearer configuration (including bearer configuration: RoHC state information, etc.), an AS security context (Access Stratum Security Context). , L2 / L1 parameters (MAC, PHY configuration, etc.).
  • RRC configuration RRC configuration
  • bearer configuration including bearer configuration: RoHC state information, etc.
  • AS security context Access Stratum Security Context
  • L2 / L1 parameters MAC, PHY configuration, etc.
  • the UE 50 and the eNB 10 may hold the same information as the UE context, the UE 50 holds only the UE context information necessary for the connection with the eNB 10, and the eNB 10 is the UE required for the connection with the UE 50. Only context information may be retained.
  • each of the UE 50 and the eNB 10 has RadioResourceConfigDedicated information carried by RRC Connection Setup, capability information carried by RRC Connection Setup Complete, and security-related information (key information etc.), RRC Security related information carried in Security Mode Command, configuration information carried in RRC Connection Reconfiguration, and the like are held as UE context. Note that these are merely examples, and information held as a UE context is not limited to these, and information may be additionally held, or part of the information may not be held.
  • UE10 and eNB10 each hold the above information as a UE context, so that when transitioning from the RRC idle state to the RRC connected state, RRCRRSecurity Mode Command, RRC Security Mode Complete, RRC Connection Reconfiguration, RRC Connection Reconfiguration Complete
  • the RRC connection can be established without sending / receiving messages such as.
  • the eNB 10 holds the UE context in the storage unit in association with the identifier (UE identifier) of the UE corresponding to the UE context.
  • UE identifier the identifier
  • S-TMSI SAE temporary mobile subscriber identity
  • FIG. 6 is a diagram showing another example of the processing sequence of the entire system in the present embodiment.
  • FIG. 6 is a processing sequence in the case where the UE 50 is connected to the eNB 10 to be in the RRC connected state, is in the RRC idle state in the cell under the eNB 10, and is subsequently received in the same cell, as in FIG. is there.
  • the sequence shown in FIG. 6 is different from FIG. 5 in that there are steps 113 and 114. In the following, differences from FIG. 5 will be mainly described.
  • the UE 50 changes from the RRC idle state to the RRC connected state.
  • the UE contexts held in the UE 50 and the eNB 10 change from the inactive state to the active state. That is, according to the procedure of step 110, the UE contexts held in the UE 50 and the eNB 10 are activated.
  • step 111 the eNB 10 transmits to the MME 30 RRC connection establishment completion, which is a signal indicating that establishment of the RRC connection is completed.
  • This RRC connection establishment completion signal may be a signal indicating that the UE context of the UE 50 has been activated.
  • the MME 30 transmits an RRC connection establishment completion signal to the S-GW 40 (step 112).
  • the S-GW 40 transmits a response signal to the RRC connection establishment completion signal to the MME 30.
  • the MME 30 transmits a response signal to the signal indicating completion of RRC connection establishment in Step 111 to the eNB 10.
  • the response signal in step 114 may be an Ack signal for a signal indicating that the UE context has been activated.
  • the S-GW 40 starts transferring the suspended downlink data to the eNB 10 (step 115).
  • the downlink data reaches the UE 50 from the eNB 10 (step 116). In this way, transmission of downlink data to the UE 50 is started.
  • the UE 50 transmits an RRC Connection Request message (RRC connection request) to the eNB 10 in Step 201 by using the resource allocated by the UL grant included in the Random Access Response.
  • the UE 50 notifies the eNB 10 that the UE 50 holds the UE context using a spare bit (spare bit: 1 bit) in the RRC Connection Request message. For example, when the bit is set (it is 1), it indicates that the UE 50 holds the UE context. This information indicating that the UE 50 holds the UE context will be referred to as UE context holding information.
  • the RRC Connection Request message includes a UE identifier for identifying the UE 50 (specifically, S-TMSI (SAE temporary mobile subscriber identity)) in addition to the above bits.
  • S-TMSI is a temporary identifier of the UE 50 generated from the unique identifier of the UE 50, and is issued from the MME 30 when the location of the UE 50 is registered.
  • UE50 and each eNB shall hold
  • the eNB 10 that has received the RRC Connection Request message in step 201 recognizes that the UE 50 identified by the UE identifier holds the UE context by reading the UE context holding information and the UE identifier from the message, and holds it.
  • the UE context corresponding to the UE identifier is retrieved from the storage means from the plurality of UE contexts that are being used. That is, UE identifier matching processing is performed.
  • step 202 when the eNB 10 detects the UE context corresponding to the UE identifier as a result of the search, the eNB 10 notifies the UE 50 that the eNB 10 holds the UE context of the UE 50 by an RRC Connection Setup message (RRC connection establishment message). At the same time, the UE 50 is requested to transmit information for authenticating the UE 50.
  • RRC connection establishment message RRC Connection Setup message
  • the UE 50 that has received the RRC Connection Setup message including information indicating that the UE 50 holds the UE context continues to use the held UE context (bearer, security key, configuration, etc.).
  • the RadioResourceConfigDedicated included in the RRC Connection Setup message includes parameter values related to the bearer, MAC, PHY configuration, and the like. Ignore the parameter value notified by, and continue to use the parameter value of the UE context that was held. The notified parameter value may be used without ignoring the parameter value notified by RadioResourceConfigDedicated. Thereby, when the parameter value already hold
  • the UE 50 transmits the RRC Connection Setup Complete message including the authentication information such as Authentication token, shortMAC-I, and the like to the eNB 10.
  • Authentication information such as Authentication token and shortMAC-I is information used by the eNB 10 to authenticate the UE 50.
  • the eNB 10 that has received the RRC Connection Setup Complete message authenticates that the UE 50 is a correct UE corresponding to the UE context searched by the UE identifier, using the authentication information included in the message. After that, each of the UE 50 and the eNB 10 establishes (restarts) a connection using the held UE context. Note that when establishing (resuming) a connection using the retained UE context, step 203 is not necessarily required, and step 203 may not be performed.
  • the UE context may always be retained, or the UE context is retained in the RRC Connection Release message. It is good also as holding
  • the eNB 10 when the eNB 10 causes the UE 50 to transition to the RRC idle state, the eNB 10 transmits an RRCRRConnection ⁇ ⁇ ⁇ ⁇ ⁇ Release message to the UE 50 (step 301).
  • the RRC Connection Release message includes indication information (indication) that instructs the UE 50 to continue to hold the UE context in the RRC idle state.
  • indication information instructs the UE 50 to continue to hold the UE context in the RRC idle state.
  • a new indication may be included in the message, or a spare bit of an existing release cause may be used. Specific examples will be described later.
  • the UE 50 When the UE 50 detects the instruction information from the RRC Connection Release message, the UE 50 continues to hold the UE context (bearer information, security information, etc.) at the RRC idle state transition during the RRC idle state.
  • the UE context bearer information, security information, etc.
  • the UE 10 performs a transition between the RRC connection state and the RRC idle state under the same eNB 10, but here, as another example, the UE 50 connects to the eNB 10.
  • the processing sequence when the UE enters the RRC connection state, enters the RRC idle state in the cell under the control of the eNB 10, and then moves to the cell under the control of the eNB 20 to receive the incoming call will be described with reference to FIG.
  • the UE 50 is in the RRC connection state in the cell of the eNB 10 and is in a state where the S1-C / U connection is established.
  • the eNB 10 transmits a connection maintenance instruction signal to the MME 30 (Step 401). Also, the MME 30 transmits a connection maintenance instruction signal to the S-GW 40 (step 402).
  • connection maintenance instruction signal is a signal instructing to hold down the downlink data in the S-GW 40 and perform paging from the MME 30 when the UE 50 arrives while maintaining the S1-C / U connection related to the UE 50. It is.
  • the S-GW 40 that has received the connection maintenance instruction signal transmits a confirmation response to the MME 30 (step 403), and the MME 30 transmits a confirmation response to the eNB 10 (step 404).
  • ENB10 transmits RRC connection release (RRC
  • the RRC Connection Release message includes an instruction to hold the UE context, and the UE 50 holds the UE context. However, this UE context is information used for connection with the eNB 10.
  • downlink data for the UE 50 is generated, and the downlink data arrives at the S-GW 40 (step 406).
  • the S1-U connection has been established, but based on the connection maintenance instruction signal received in step 402, the S-GW 40 holds the downlink data in the buffer without transferring it to the eNB 10.
  • the S-GW 40 transmits a downlink data incoming notification to the MME 30 (step 407), and the MME 30 transmits an S1-AP paging signal for the UE 50 to the eNB 20 (step 408).
  • This paging itself is the same as the existing paging and is transmitted to each eNB (each of one or a plurality of eNBs) in the tracking area of the UE 50, but FIG. 9 shows transmission to the eNB 20.
  • the eNB 20 that has received the S1-AP paging signal transmits the RRC paging signal to the subordinate UE 50 (step 409).
  • UE50 which received RRC paging performs a RRC connection establishment procedure, and establishes a RRC connection (step 410). Further, a NAS connection procedure is executed between the eNB 20 and the core NW side (S-GW 40 in FIG. 9), and an S1-C / U connection for the eNB 20 is established (step 411).
  • the S-GW 40 starts transmission of downlink data to the UE 50 (steps 412 and S413). Further, the UE context between the eNB 10 and the MME 30 is released, and the S1-C / U connection for the eNB 10 is released (step 414).
  • the UE 50 transmits the message in step 201 in FIG. 7, but the eNB 20 determines that the UE context corresponding to the UE 50 is not held.
  • An RRC connection procedure is performed.
  • the eNB 20 determines that the UE context does not hold the UE context corresponding to the UE 50
  • the PCI notified from the UE 50 by the message in the RRC connection establishment procedure (identifies the eNB 10 of the cell in which the UE 50 holds the UE context).
  • the UE context of the UE 50 may be acquired from the eNB 10 based on the cell ID) and the like, and the RRC connection may be performed using the UE context.
  • FIG. 10A shows an example of an RRC Connection Request message transmitted from the UE 50 in Step 201 of FIG.
  • ue-ContextStoring (example: 1 bit) is added.
  • ue-ContextStoring is information indicating that the UE 50 holds the UE context used in the previous RRC connection.
  • S-TMSI is included.
  • FIG. 11A shows an example of an RRC Connection Setup message transmitted from the eNB 10 in step 202 of FIG. As shown in FIG. 11A, ue-ContextStored and ue-AuthenticationInfoReq are added.
  • ue-AuthenticationInfoReq is information requesting the UE to transmit authentication information.
  • ue-ContextStored is information indicating that the eNB holds the UE context of the UE that is the target of RRC Connection Setup.
  • the UE detects the presence of this information (field)
  • the UE ignores the radioRecourceConfigDedicated field notified by the RRC Connection Setup message.
  • the parameter value notified by this may be applied without ignoring the radioRecourceConfigDedicated field.
  • FIG. 12 shows an example of an RRC Connection Setup message transmitted from the UE 50 in Step 203 of FIG. As shown in FIG. 12, authentication information ue-AuthenticationToken and ue-AuthenticationInfo are added.
  • 13 to 14 show examples 1 and 2 of RRC Connection Release message transmitted from the eNB 10 in step 301 of FIG.
  • FIGS. 13A and 13B show an example (Example 1) of instructing UE context retention using Cause value.
  • UEcontextHolding is added in ReleaseCause.
  • the value of ue-ContextHolding indicates an instruction to keep the UE context while the UE is in the RRC idle state.
  • FIGS. 14A and 14B show an example (Example 2) in which a UE context retention instruction is performed using a new indication.
  • ue-ContextHolding is added as a new indication.
  • ue-ContextHolding indicates an instruction that the UE continues to hold the UE context while in the RRC idle state.
  • the UE 50 transmits an RRC Connection Request message (RRC connection request) to the eNB 10 in Step 201 by using the resource allocated by the UL grant included in the Random Access Response.
  • RRC connection request RRC Connection request
  • the UE 50 transmits the authentication information included in the RRC Connection Request message.
  • the authentication information is information used by the eNB 10 to authenticate the UE 50, and includes, for example, C-RNTI, PCI, and ShortMAC-I used in the previous RRC connection.
  • this authentication information is an example of UE context holding information for notifying the eNB 10 that the UE 50 holds the UE context.
  • the eNB 10 that has received the RRC Connection Request message in step 201 authenticates the UE 50 using the authentication information, and detects that the authentication has succeeded and the UE context of the UE 50 is retained.
  • an RRC Connection Setup message (RRC connection establishment message) including information instructing to activate (activate) the UE context held by the UE 50 is transmitted to the UE 50 (step 202).
  • the above detection is performed by, for example, storing the UE context corresponding to the UE-specific identifier (eg, S-TMSI, C-RNTI, shortMAC-I) from the storage unit among the plurality of UE contexts held by the eNB 10. This can be done by searching.
  • the information for instructing activation (activation) of the UE context is an example of context holding information indicating that the eNB 10 holds the UE context of the UE 50.
  • the eNB 10 transmits to the UE 50 an RRCjectConnection ⁇ ⁇ Reject message that rejects the RRC connection. If the eNB 10 cannot detect that the eNB 10 holds the UE context of the UE 50 even if the authentication is successful, the eNB 10 instructs to activate (activate) the UE context held by the UE 50.
  • RRC Connection Setup message RRC connection establishment message
  • the UE 50 that has received the RRC Connection Setup message including information instructing activation of the UE context activates the retained UE context (bearer, security key, configuration, etc.).
  • Activating means activating the retained UE context, and includes, for example, various radio resource settings, measurement settings, authentication key update processing, and the like. Note that the activation process is not limited to a specific process.
  • the RadioResourceConfigDedicated included in the RRC Connection Setup message may include parameter values related to the bearer, MAC, PHY configuration, and the like.
  • the UE 50 that has received the RRC Connection Setup message including the activation instruction in Step 202 receives the RadioResourceConfigDedicated.
  • the parameter value notified by is applied.
  • the application is made in accordance with “5.3.105.3Radio resource configuration” in Non-Patent Document 3, for example. That is, setting is performed based on information included in RadioResourceConfigDedicated.
  • the UE 50 when the UE 50 holds the information “A” in RadioResourceConfigDedicated at the time of the previous RRC connection as part of the UE context, and receives the information “B” by RadioResourceConfigDedicated in Step 202, the UE 50 In addition to the information “A”, the information “B” can be used.
  • the UE 50 holds information “A” in RadioResourceConfigDedicated at the time of the previous RRC connection as a part of the UE context, and is the same type as “A” but has a different value by “RadioResourceConfigDedicated” in Step 202.
  • the held “A” is updated (changed) by “A ′” received in step 202.
  • the parameter difference between the stored RadioResourceConfigDedicated information and the RadioResourceConfigDedicated information received in Step 202 can be set. This is called delta configuration.
  • step 203 the UE 50 transmits an RRC Connection Setup Complete message to the eNB 10.
  • FIG. 15 shows an example of a change in the specification that defines the operation of the UE 50 when the RRC Connection Request message is transmitted from the UE 50 in Step 201 of FIG.
  • VarAS-Config is a variable for storing the UE context (AS configuration).
  • FIG. 16A shows an example of an RRC Connection Request message transmitted from the UE 50 in step 201 of FIG.
  • authentication information “UE-AS-ConfigIdenity” is added.
  • “UE-AS-ConfigIdenity” includes information for identifying and authenticating the AS configuration (UE context) held in the UE 50 and the E-UTRAN (that is, the eNB 10).
  • the information includes, for example, C-RNTI, PCI, and ShortMAC-I at the previous RRC connection.
  • FIG. 17 shows an example of a change in the specification that defines the operation when the UE 50 receives the RRC Connection Setup message transmitted from the eNB 10 in step 202 of FIG.
  • nextHopChainingCount is included in the RRCConnectionSetup message:”
  • the UE 50 that operates according to the specification first confirms whether or not the UE context (valid AS configuration) is held. It is determined whether or not activation of the context is instructed (ue-AS-ConfigActivate is set to true) and nextHopChainingCount is included.
  • nextHopChainingCount is a value used when updating the authentication key.
  • UE context activation is instructed (ue-AS-ConfigActivate is set to true) and nextHopChainingCount is included,” it is determined that authentication at the eNB 10 is successful, and is retained. Activate the activated UE context.
  • RadioResourceConfigDedicated received in the RRCConnectionSetup message is applied as described in “1> perform the radio resource configuration procedure in accordance with the received radioResourceConfigDedicated and as specified in 5.3.10;". Thereby, it becomes possible to perform the delta-configuration described above.
  • FIG. 18A shows an example of an RRC Connection Setup message transmitted from the eNB 10 in step 202 of FIG.
  • ue-AS-ConfigActivate and nextHopChainingCount are added.
  • ue-AS-ConfigActivate indicates that the UE 50 resumes the use of the UE context that has been held.
  • the eNB 10 transmits an RRC connection Reject message to the UE 50 in the case of authentication NG. Regardless of whether or not the authentication is NG, the eNB 10 may reject the RRC Connection due to congestion, for example, and may send an RRC connection Reject message to the UE 50.
  • the UE 50 that has received the RRC connection Reject message executes, for example, the following Option 1 or Option 2 operation.
  • Option-1 UE50 releases it when it is instructed to release AS configuration (UE context) in RRC connectionReject. On the other hand, if not (if there is no release instruction), AS configuration is retained.
  • Option-2 UE50 keeps holding it when it is instructed to hold (storing) AS-configuration in RRC connection-Reject. Conversely, if not (if there is no instruction to hold), the AS configuration is released.
  • FIG. 19 shows an example of a UE operation specification change when receiving an RRC connection Reject corresponding to Option 1
  • FIG. 20 shows an example of a UE operation specification change when receiving an RRC connection Reject corresponding to Option 2.
  • ue-AS-ConfigStoring As shown in FIG. 20, “1> if ue-AS-ConfigStoring is included and the UE stores the AS configuration into VarAS-Config specified in 7.1: 2> keep the AS configuration stored into VarAS-Config; In option IV2, the UE 50 continues to hold the UE context when receiving the holding instruction (ue-AS-ConfigStoring). Also, in the case where there is a holding instruction, the UE is described as ⁇ 2> if ue-AS-ConfigValidityTime is included: 3> overwrite the AS configuration validity time with the received value in ue-AS-ConfigValidityTime; '' Overwrite the context validity time (validity time) with the value of ue-AS-ConfigValidityTime.
  • FIGS. 21A and 21B show an example of changing the specification of the RRC connection Reject message corresponding to Option 1
  • Figs. 22A and 22B show an example of the specification change of the RRC connection Reject message corresponding to Option 2.
  • ue-AS-ConfigValidityTime indicates the updated maximum retention time of the UE context during the RRC idle state.
  • the RRC connection release procedure in the first modification is the same as the procedure described with reference to FIG.
  • the message contents shown in FIGS. 13 and 14 may be used, or other examples may be used as described below.
  • FIG. 23A shows an example 3 of the RRC Connection Release message transmitted from the eNB 10 in step 301 of FIG.
  • ue-AS-ConfigDeactive is included.
  • ue-AS-ConfigDeactive corresponds to the UE context holding instruction described above.
  • ue-AS-ConfigValidityTime indicating a period (time) for holding the UE context is added.
  • ue-AS-ConfigDeactive indicates that the UE 50 holds the UE context while in the RRC idle state.
  • ue-AS-ConfigValidityTime indicates the maximum time (holding time limit) for holding the UE context while the UE 50 is in the RRC idle state.
  • FIG. 24 shows an example of a change in the specification that defines the operation of the UE 50 that receives the RRC Connection Release message when the RRC Connection Connection Release message shown in FIGS.
  • the UE 50 operating according to the specification confirms that ue-AS-ConfigDeactive is included in the RRC Connection Release message (ue-AS-ConfigDeactive is set to true)
  • the current radioResourceConfigDedicated radio resource setting information
  • securityAlgorithmConfig security algorithm setting information
  • measConfig measurement setting information
  • UE50 stores PCell's physCellId in VarAS-Config, and stores the current ue-Identity in VarAS-Config.
  • the UE 50 (and the eNB 10) that has received the RRC Connection Release message including the UE context holding instruction and has shifted to the RRC idle state basically keeps holding the UE context during the RRC idle state. However, when the period in the RRC idle state is very long, for example, the UE 50 and the eNB 10 continue to hold the UE context becomes a load on each of the UE 50 and the eNB 10.
  • the UE 50 provides a finite time (UE context retention time limit) that the UE context retains.
  • UE context retention time limit UE context retention time limit
  • ue-AS-ConfigValidityTime indicates the time.
  • FIG. 25 shows a modification example of the specification (Non-Patent Document 3) in the case where the UE context retention period as described above is provided.
  • FIG. 25 shows that VarAS-Config, which is a variable that holds the UE context, is added to “7.1 UE variables” of the specification.
  • VarAS-Config includes a UE context (AS configuration) stored in UE 50 during the RRC idle state.
  • the UE 50 determines that the UE context has become invalid when a predetermined period (the above T) has elapsed after leaving the RRC connection state.
  • VarAS-Config includes RadioResourceConfigDedicated, SecurityAlgorithmConfig, MeasConfig, NextHopChainingCount, PhysCellId, S-TMSI, and C-RNTI as the UE context (AS configuration).
  • RadioResourceConfigDedicated includes RadioResourceConfigDedicated, SecurityAlgorithmConfig, MeasConfig, NextHopChainingCount, PhysCellId, S-TMSI, and C-RNTI as the UE context (AS configuration).
  • RAS-Config includes RadioResourceConfigDedicated, SecurityAlgorithmConfig, MeasConfig, NextHopChainingCount, PhysCellId, S-TMSI, and C-RNTI as the UE context (AS configuration).
  • the predetermined period for holding the UE context (the above T) may be fixed according to the specification, or set from the eNB 10 to the UE 50 using ue-AS-ConfigValidityTime as in the example of FIG. It is good.
  • Providing the UE context retention period as described above is also applicable to the basic example.
  • Modification 2 Context Fetch
  • the eNB 20 identifies the eNB 10 based on the information notified from the UE 50, and the UE 50 of the UE 50 from the eNB 10 It is possible to obtain a context and make an RRC connection using the UE context.
  • Context Fetch that a certain eNB acquires a UE context from another eNB.
  • each of the eNB 10 and the eNB 20 has a context holding function and a function of executing a context acquisition procedure as described below.
  • the process between the UE 50 and the eNB 20 will be described with reference to FIG.
  • the UE 50 is in an RRC idle state and holds a UE context at the time of connection with the eNB 10. Then, the UE 50 moves to the cell under the eNB 20 in the RRC idle state, and when the call is made or when the incoming procedure is received, the transition procedure to the RRC connected state is activated.
  • the transition procedure to the RRC connected state is activated.
  • Step 451 Random Access Preamble is transmitted from the UE 50 to the eNB 20, and in Step 452, Random Access Response is returned from the eNB 20 to the UE 50.
  • the UE 50 transmits an RRC Connection Request message to the eNB 20.
  • information specifying the eNB in this case, eNB 10 holding the eNB-side UE context corresponding to the UE context held by the UE 50, and specifying that the UE context belongs to the UE 50 Information (information for specifying the UE context of the UE 50).
  • the RRC Connection Request message includes authentication information for authenticating the UE context of the UE 50.
  • the authentication information is, for example, C-RNTI, PCI, and ShortMAC-I at the previous RRC connection.
  • an ID (herein referred to as “resume ID”) having information identifying the eNB and information identifying the UE context is included in the RRC Connection Request message.
  • the bit length of the resume ID transmitted in the RRC Connection Request message is 24 bits.
  • the eNB and the UE context are made with the upper few bits and the lower few bits of the resume ID.
  • the upper 8 bits in the resume ID transmitted in the RRC Connection ⁇ Request message may be information for specifying the eNB, and the lower 16 bits may be information for specifying the UE context.
  • a case where the eNB holding the UE context of a specific UE cannot be specified with a 24-bit resume ID may occur. That is, for example, when the eNB 20 has information (addresses, etc.) of a plurality of eNBs (destination candidate eNBs that perform Context Fetch) corresponding to the information for eNB identification in the resume ID of the RRC Connection Connection Request message, It cannot be determined to which eNB Context Fetch may be performed.
  • the eNB requests the UE from the eNB for a resume ID (this is called a long resume ID) that is longer than the resumeresID (this is called a short resume ID). It is said.
  • the following steps are examples for making such a request.
  • the short resume ID is an example of context holding information indicating that the UE holds the UE context.
  • step 454 the eNB 20 transmits an RRC Connection Setup message including information requesting the UE 50 for a long resume ID to the UE 50.
  • the RRCRRConnection Setup message includes information for activating the UE context.
  • step 455 the UE 50 transmits an RRC Connection Setup Complete message including long resume ID to the eNB 20.
  • the bit length of long resume ID is 40 bits, for example. Then, for example, it is conceivable that the upper 24 bits in the long resume ID are information for specifying the eNB and the lower 16 bits are information for specifying the UE context. These numerical values are only examples.
  • short resume ID may be used.
  • the UE context may be specified by the first (upper) 16 bits of short resume ID
  • the resume ID is set to a predetermined bit length (eg, 40 bits)
  • the first predetermined bit eg, 24 bits
  • the remaining predetermined bits eg, 16 bits
  • the short resume ID included in the RRC Connection Request message is 40 bits, and the short resume ID is added to the eNB identification information and the UE context identification information, and the authentication of the UE corresponding to the UE context.
  • Information corresponding to shortMAC-I may be included.
  • information for authenticating the UE corresponding to the UE context (corresponding to shortMAC-I) Information).
  • the RRC Connection Setup is transmitted in Step 454 and the RRC Connection Setup Complete is transmitted in Step 455, but the long Resume ID request and the long Resume ID are requested. Does not include transmission.
  • the short Resume ID indicates itself (eNB 20)
  • the short Resume ID indicates itself (eNB 20)
  • Context Fetch for other eNBs is not performed.
  • the request for the long Resume ID and transmission of the long Resume ID may be included.
  • the eNB 20 identifies the eNB 10 as the eNB that holds the UE context based on the resume ID received from the UE 50 (only the short resume ID, only the long resume ID, or the combination of the long resume ID and the short resume ID). Context acquisition procedure is executed with
  • step 455 the UE 50 transmits an RRC Connection Setup Complete message to the eNB 20.
  • the eNB 20 transmits a context request message to the eNB 10 identified by the resume ID.
  • the context request message includes a resume ID and authentication information.
  • resume ID As will be described later, when resume ⁇ ID itself includes authentication information, authentication information other than resume ID may not be included.
  • the eNB 10 that has received the context request message stores information in the eNB 10 based on information identifying the UE context of the UE 50 (eg, lower 16 bits of short resume ID, lower 16 bits of long resume ID, etc.).
  • the UE context of the UE 50 is identified and acquired from a plurality of held UE contexts, and authentication is performed using authentication information. Here, it is assumed that the authentication is successful.
  • step 462 the eNB 10 transmits a context response message including the acquired UE context to the eNB 20.
  • ENB20 which acquired UE context of UE50 transmits the RRC
  • the UE 50 transmits an RRC Connection Reconfiguration Complete message to the eNB 20.
  • UE50 and eNB20 reuse UE context, establish the connection between UE50 and eNB20, and make a state change to a RRC connection state.
  • the UE 50 and the eNB 20 can establish the RRC connection between the UE 50 and the eNB 20 by reusing the retained / acquired UE context, and therefore the steps 471 and 47 may not be executed.
  • the UE 50 may ignore a part or all of the configuration information received by the RRC Connection Reconfiguration message.
  • you may apply the configuration information received with a RRC
  • step 473 when the eNB 20 has executed the context acquisition procedure but failed to acquire the target UE context (step 473), for example, an RRC Connection Release message is transmitted, and the UE 50 is set in the RRC idle state (step 474).
  • FIG. 28A shows an example of an RRC Connection Request message transmitted from the UE 50 in Step 453 of FIG.
  • shortResumeIdentity in addition to UE-AS-ConfigIdenity that is authentication information, a shortResumeIdentity corresponding to the short-resume ID described above is added.
  • shortResumeIdentity in this example is a 24-bit identifier for identifying the UE context (AS configuration) and the eNB that stores the UE context.
  • FIG. 29A shows an example of the RRC Connection Setup message transmitted from the eNB 20 in step 454 of FIG.
  • requestLongResumeIdentity is shown in addition to the ue-AS-ConfigActivate and nextHopChainingCount described above.
  • requestLongResumeIdentity corresponds to the request for long resume ID described above.
  • requestLongResumeIdentity indicates that the UE is requested to provide longResumeIdentity (long resume ID).
  • FIG. 30A shows an example of the RRC Connection Setup message transmitted from the UE 50 in Step 455 of FIG.
  • longResumeIdentity corresponding to the long-resume ID described above is added.
  • longResumeIdentity in this example is a 40-bit identifier for identifying a UE context (AS configuration) and an eNB that stores the UE context.
  • the RRC Connection Request message and the RRC Connection Setup Complete message may have the contents shown in FIGS. 31A and 31B and FIGS. 32A and 32B. Again, the RRCRRConnection Setup message is the same as that shown in FIGS. 29A and 29B.
  • FIG. 31A shows an example of an RRC Connection Request message transmitted from the UE 50 in step 453 of FIG.
  • shortResumeIdentity corresponding to short resume ID is added in addition to UE-AS-ConfigIdenity which is authentication information.
  • the shortResumeIdentity in this example identifies the UE context (AS configuration) and the eNB that stores the UE context, and further identifies a 40-bit identifier for authenticating the UE corresponding to the UE context. It is.
  • “authenticating the UE corresponding to the UE context” also means “authenticating that the UE is a person in the stored UE context”.
  • shortMAC-I may not be included in UE-AS-ConfigIdenity.
  • FIG. 32A shows an example of the RRC Connection Setup message transmitted from the UE 50 in Step 455 of FIG.
  • a longResumeIdentity corresponding to a longresume ID is added.
  • the longResumeIdentity in this example identifies the UE context (AS configuration) and the eNB that stores the UE context, and also a 56-bit identifier for authenticating the UE corresponding to the UE context. It is.
  • the RRC Connection Request message and RRC Connection Setup Complete message may have the contents shown in FIGS. 33A and B and FIGS. 34A and B.
  • the RRCRRConnection Setup message is the same as that shown in FIGS. 29A and 29B.
  • the resume ID is 40 bits as a whole, the first 24 bits are included in the RRC Connection Request message, and the remaining 16 bits are included in the RRC Connection Setup message.
  • the first 24 bits included in the RRC Connection Connection Request message are referred to as a “short Resume ID”, and an identifier including the remaining 16 bits included in the RRC Connection Connection Setup message and the first 24 bits is “long”. It may be called “resume ID”.
  • FIG. 33A shows an example of an RRC Connection Request message transmitted from the UE 50 in Step 453 of FIG.
  • resumeIdentity-LSB in addition to UE-AS-ConfigIdenity which is authentication information, resumeIdentity-LSB corresponding to the above short-resume ID is added. As illustrated in FIG. 33B, the resumeIdentity-LSB is the least significant 24 bits in the UE context (AS configuration) and the resume identity for identifying the eNB storing the UE context.
  • FIG. 34A shows an example of the RRC Connection Complete message transmitted from the UE 50 in step 455 of FIG.
  • resumeIdentity-MSB is added.
  • the resumeIdentity-MSB is the most significant (most significant) 16 bits in the UE context (AS configuration) and the resume identity for identifying the eNB storing the UE context.
  • the RRC Connection Request message and RRC Connection Setup Complete message may have the contents shown in FIGS. 35A and B, and FIGS. 36A and B.
  • the RRCRRConnection Setup message is the same as that shown in FIGS. 29A and 29B.
  • information for authenticating the UE corresponding to the UE context is added to the resume ID shown in FIGS. 33A and 33B and FIGS. 34A and 34B.
  • FIG. 35A shows an example of an RRC Connection Request message transmitted from the UE 50 in Step 453 of FIG.
  • resumeIdentity-LSB is added in addition to UE-AS-ConfigIdenity which is authentication information.
  • the resumeIdentity-LSB in this example identifies the UE context (AS configuration) and the eNB that stores the UE context, and further resume_identity for authenticating the UE corresponding to the UE context.
  • FIG. 36A shows an example of the RRC Connection Setup message transmitted from the UE 50 in Step 455 of FIG.
  • resumeIdentity-MSB is added.
  • the resumeIdentity-MSB in this example identifies the UE context (AS configuration) and the eNB that stores the UE context, and further resume resume identity for authenticating the UE corresponding to the UE context. Most significant 16 bits.
  • the UE 50 notifies the eNB 10 that the UE context is held. This is based on the premise that the eNB 10 corresponds to a UE context holding function (a function for performing connection by reusing a retained UE context, or a function for performing connection by reusing a UE context acquired by Context Fetch). It is said.
  • a UE context holding function a function for performing connection by reusing a retained UE context, or a function for performing connection by reusing a UE context acquired by Context Fetch. It is said.
  • the UE 50 desirably performs the UE context retention notification operation described in FIG. 7 or the like when it is confirmed that the eNB of the cell in the area has the UE context retention function.
  • the UE 50 determines whether the eNB 10 has a UE context holding function.
  • the third modification can be applied to any one of the first modification, the second modification, and the basic example. Examples 1 to 3 will be described below.
  • the “UE context maintenance function” in Modification 3 is a function of using (ie, reusing) the UE context held in a state that is not in the RRC connection state and establishing an RRC connection from the state. .
  • the eNB does not have a UE context holding function, or the eNB does not support the UE context holding function, not only when the eNB does not hold the UE context holding function as a capability, but also as a capability. Includes the case where the function is stopped.
  • Example 1 the eNB 10 notifies the UE 50 of information indicating whether or not the eNB 10 is compatible with the UE context holding function using the notification information.
  • the notification information for example, MIB, SIB1, and SIB2 can be used.
  • criticalExtRRC-ConnEstReqAllowed reported by SIB2 is an example of the information.
  • maintenance function is demonstrated.
  • the eNB 10 broadcasts information indicating whether or not the UE context holding function is supported using the SIB1.
  • the UE 50 receives SIB1 from the eNB 10.
  • the UE 50 reads information indicating whether the eNB 10 is compatible with the UE context holding function from the SIB1, and determines whether the eNB 10 is compatible with the UE context holding function based on the information. To do.
  • step 502 determines whether the determination result in step 502 is Yes (corresponding). If the determination result in step 502 is Yes (corresponding), the process proceeds to step S503, and the UE 50 executes the procedure described in FIG. 7 and the like when transitioning to the RRC connection state. That is, the UE 50 performs notification of information indicating that the UE context is held. Note that although S503 in FIG. 34 describes that the procedure shown in FIG. 7 is executed, this is an example, and for example, the procedure shown in FIG. 26 may be executed.
  • step 502 determines whether the determination result in step 502 is No (not supported). If the determination result in step 502 is No (not supported), the process proceeds to step S504, and the UE 50 discards the held UE context and does not use a spare bit or the like when transitioning to the RRC connection state. A normal RRC Connection Request (or no authentication information or the like) is transmitted to the eNB 10.
  • Example 2 the eNB 10 notifies the UE 50 by Random Access Response in the random access procedure whether the eNB 10 supports the UE context holding function.
  • Example 2 An example of the operation of the UE 50 in Example 2 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. Here, for example, a situation is shown in which the UE 50 in the RRC idle state receives paging (or makes a call) and transitions to the RRC connected state.
  • step 601 UE 50 transmits Random Access Preamble to eNB10.
  • step 602 the UE 50 receives Random Access Response from the eNB 10.
  • the Random Access Response includes information indicating whether the eNB 10 supports the UE context holding function.
  • the UE 50 reads information indicating whether or not the eNB 10 supports the UE context holding function from the Random Access ⁇ Response, and whether or not the eNB 10 supports the UE context holding function based on the information. Determine.
  • step 603 When the determination result in step 603 is Yes (corresponding), the process proceeds to step S604, and the UE 50 executes the procedure described in FIG. That is, the UE 50 performs notification of information indicating that the UE context is held. Note that although S604 in FIG. 38 describes that the procedure shown in FIG. 7 is executed, this is an example, and for example, the procedure shown in FIG. 26 may be executed.
  • step 603 If the determination result in step 603 is No (not supported), the process proceeds to step S605, and the UE 50 discards the held UE context and transmits a normal RRC Connection Request that does not use spare bits to the eNB 10 .
  • Example 39 and 40 show examples of Random Access response messages in Example 2 of Modification 3 (see Non-Patent Document 4 for the conventional example).
  • MAC RAR is included in the MAC PDU.
  • Example 2 information indicating whether or not the UE context holding function is supported is notified using a reserve bit in the MAC RAR. As an example, if the bit is 1, it indicates that the UE context holding function is supported, and if it is 0, it indicates that it is not supported. 1 and 0 may be reversed.
  • Example 3 For example 3, the basic example is targeted.
  • the UE 50 maintains the UE context holding function in the eNB 10 based on whether or not the above-described ue-ContextStored (information indicating that the eNB 10 holds the UE context corresponding to the UE 50) is included in the RRC Connection Setup message. Judge whether or not it is compatible.
  • Example 3 the UE 50 always notifies the eNB that the UE context is held by the RRC Connection Request, and executes the operation shown in FIG. However, here, whether or not the UE context holding function is supported in the eNB 10 is determined based on the RRC Connection Setup message.
  • the UE 50 in Example 3 when the UE 50 in the RRC idle state attempts to transition to the RRC connection state, in step 701, the UE 50 transmits an RRC Connection Request message including information indicating that the UE context is held to the eNB 10 .
  • step 702 the UE 50 receives the RRC Connection Setup message from the eNB10.
  • step 703 the UE 50 determines whether or not ue-ContextStored is included in the RRC Connection Setup message. If the determination result is Yes (included), the UE 50 proceeds to step 704, and the determination result is No ( If it is not included, the process proceeds to step 705.
  • step 704 the UE 50 continuously uses the held UE context, and transmits an RRC Connection Complete message similar to that in step 203 in FIG.
  • step 705 the UE 50 discards the held UE context, and creates a UE context (bearer, MAC config, PHY config, etc.) reflecting the setting value in RadioResourceConfigDedicated included in the RRC Connection Setup message. Used for connection (communication) with the eNB 10.
  • step 705 the normal RRC connection procedure is executed.
  • UE 50 transmits an RRC Connection Request message including information indicating that the UE context is held.
  • DRB Data Radio Bearer
  • SRB Signal Radio Bearer
  • IoT Internet of Things
  • MTC Machin Type Communication
  • the eNB may not operate properly unless the eNB side knows which method the connected UE supports. .
  • the UE 50 responds to each of the DRB method and the SRB method in the RRC Connection Request message.
  • ENB 10 is notified of whether or not
  • the information bit is added by increasing the size of the RRC Connection Request message, the reception quality on the eNB side of the RRC Connection Request message transmitted from the cell edge UE is lowered, and as a result, the quality deterioration of the cell edge UE, the cell It may lead to a reduction in radius.
  • notification is performed as follows.
  • the RRC Connection Request message is transmitted by the MAC PDU using the PUSCH resource allocated by the UL grant included in the Random Access Response. Further, the RRC Connection Request message is transmitted by CCCH (Common Control Channel, common control channel) from the viewpoint of the logical channel.
  • CCCH Common Control Channel, common control channel
  • Non-Patent Document 4 shows specifications (examples of changes from the current specifications) that define the operation related to the MAC of the communication system of the present modification.
  • the changes from the current MAC specification (Non-Patent Document 4) are underlined.
  • the CCCH when the UE supports only the SRB scheme, the CCCH is specified using the LCID “01100”. When the UE supports only the DRB scheme, the CCCH is specified using the LCID “01101”. When the UE supports both the SRB scheme and the DRB scheme, the CCCH is specified using the LCID “01110”. Note that these values are examples.
  • the eNB10 recognizes that the UE50 supports only the SRB scheme. Then, data transmission / reception using the SRB is performed.
  • the eNB10 supports the UE50 in both DRB and SRB methods. Know that you are. In this case, for example, the eNB 10 determines which of the DRB scheme and the SRB scheme is to be executed according to the capability of the UE 50 and the like.
  • the LCID when transmitting the RRC Connection Request message, the LCID is used to notify whether the DRB method / SRB method can be supported.
  • LCID may be used to notify whether the DRB method / SRB method is supported.
  • the UE 50 determines that the UE context has become invalid when a predetermined period T during which the UE context is retained has elapsed from the time when the UE context has been retained, and releases the UE context. (Deleted). That is, according to the first modification, the UE 50 operates to maintain the UE context as long as the predetermined period T does not expire, regardless of the radio access technology (RAT) of the cell to be reselected.
  • RAT radio access technology
  • the UE 50 is not limited to this, and may release (delete) the UE context according to the conditions described below.
  • cell reselection intends the operation
  • the UE 50 When performing cell reselection, the UE 50 reselects a cell other than LTE such as UMTS or GSM (registered trademark) if the cell to be reselected is a cell other than LTE. ), The UE context may be released (deleted). In this case, the UE 50 holding the UE context attempts to establish an RRC connection in a cell to be reselected (with a RAT other than LTE) (that is, when a request to establish an RRC connection is transmitted to the base station). In addition, the UE context may be released (deleted), or the UE context may be released (deleted) after an RRC connection is established in a cell to be reselected (with another RAT other than LTE). May be.
  • LTE such as UMTS or GSM (registered trademark)
  • the UE context may be released (deleted) at any timing.
  • FIG. 43 shows a specification change example (TS36.304) in this case.
  • the UE 50 When the UE 50 once accesses a cell other than LTE, it is considered that the possibility of reselecting the LTE cell immediately is low, so the memory usage of the UE 50 can be reduced.
  • the cell to be reselected is a cell other than LTE (for example, reselects a cell other than LTE such as UMTS, GSM (registered trademark)).
  • the UE context may not be released (deleted). Even if the UE 50 once accesses a cell other than LTE, the UE context can be reused when there is a possibility of reselecting the LTE cell immediately.
  • the UE 50 When performing cell reselection, the UE 50 indicates that the cell to be reselected is an LTE cell, and the broadcast information (SIB2) of the cell indicates that the eNB 10 supports the UE context holding function. If no information is included, the UE context may be released (deleted). In addition, when the UE 50 performs cell reselection, the cell to be reselected is an LTE cell, and the eNB 10 supports the UE context holding function in the broadcast information (SIB2) of the cell. May be prevented from being released (deleted).
  • SIB2 broadcast information
  • the information indicating that the eNB 10 is compatible with the UE context holding function may be information indicating whether the eNB 10 is compatible with the UE context holding function described in ⁇ Example 1> of the third modification.
  • “up-CIOT-EPS-Optimisation” may be set in SIB2 (the same applies to Example 2-2 below). Accordingly, the UE 50 can reduce the memory usage of the UE 50 when the eNB 10 does not support the UE context holding function in the cell to be reselected.
  • the information indicating whether or not the eNB 10 supports the UE context holding function may be expressed by whether or not “up-CIOT-EPS-Optimisation” is set in the SIB2. .
  • the broadcast information of the cell includes information indicating that the eNB 10 is compatible with the UE context holding function.
  • the UE context may not be released (deleted) regardless of the case and the case where the UE context is not included. Thereby, even when the eNB 10 does not support the UE context holding function, the UE context can be reused when the eNB 10 of the cell to be reselected thereafter supports the UE context holding function. become.
  • FIG. 44 shows a specification change example (TS36.304) corresponding to ⁇ Example 2-2>.
  • the MME 30 includes an eNB communication unit 31, an SGW communication unit 32, and a communication control unit 33.
  • the eNB communication unit 31 includes a function of transmitting and receiving control signals to and from the eNB through the S1-MME interface.
  • the SGW communication unit 32 includes a function of transmitting / receiving control signals to / from the S-GW through the S11 interface.
  • the communication control unit 33 When the communication control unit 33 receives a connection maintenance instruction signal from the eNB, the communication control unit 33 instructs the SGW communication unit 32 to transmit the connection maintenance instruction signal to the S-GW, and receives a confirmation response from the S-GW In addition, the SGW communication unit 32 is instructed to transmit the confirmation response to the eNB.
  • the S-GW 40 includes an eNB communication unit 41, an MME communication unit 42, an NW communication unit 43, and a communication control unit 44.
  • the eNB communication unit 41 includes a function of transmitting / receiving data to / from the eNB through the S1-U interface.
  • the MME communication unit 42 includes a function for transmitting and receiving control signals to and from the MME through the S11 interface.
  • the NW communication unit 43 includes a function of transmitting / receiving a control signal and transmitting / receiving data to / from a node device on the core NW side.
  • the communication control unit 44 includes a function of instructing the MME communication unit 42 to transmit a confirmation response to the MME when a connection maintenance instruction signal is received from the MME. Further, when the communication control unit 44 receives the connection maintenance instruction signal from the MME, when receiving the downlink data to the corresponding UE, the NW communication unit 43 holds the downlink data in the buffer. And a function to instruct the NW communication unit 43 to transmit the downlink data when the RRC connection establishment completion is received from the eNB.
  • the MME 30 and the S-GW 40 can be configured as one device. In that case, communication of the S11 interface between the SGW communication unit 32 and the MME communication unit 42 is communication inside the apparatus.
  • each of the UE 50 and the eNB 10 described below may have the functions of the basic example and all the modified examples, or any one of the functions of the basic example and all the modified examples. It is also possible to have any one of the functions of the basic example and all the modified examples.
  • FIG. 46 the functional block diagram of a user apparatus (UE50) is shown.
  • the UE 50 includes a DL signal reception unit 51, a UL signal transmission unit 52, an RRC processing unit 53, and a UE context management unit 54.
  • FIG. 46 shows only functional units that are particularly relevant to the present invention in the UE 50, and the UE 50 also has a function (not shown) for performing an operation based on at least LTE.
  • the DL signal receiving unit 51 includes a function of receiving various downlink signals from the base station eNB and acquiring higher layer information from the received physical layer signal, and the UL signal transmitting unit 52 is transmitted from the UE 50. It includes a function of generating various signals of the physical layer from information on higher layers to be transmitted and transmitting the signals to the base station eNB.
  • the UL signal transmission unit 52 includes a function of notifying the eNB 10 of the availability of the DRB method / SRB method using the LCID when transmitting an RRC ⁇ Connection Request message or the like.
  • the RRC processing unit 53 is described with reference to FIG. 7, FIG. 8, FIG. 10 to FIG. 41, etc., UE side determination processing, RRC message generation / transmission (transmission is performed via the UL signal transmission unit 52)
  • the RRC message received by the DL signal receiving unit 51 is interpreted, and an operation based on the interpretation is performed.
  • transmission / reception of the MAC signal in the random access procedure described with reference to FIGS. 38 to 40 may be performed by the DL signal receiving unit 51 and the UL signal transmitting unit 52.
  • the RRC processing unit 53 also includes a function of resuming the RRC connection using the UE context held in the UE context management unit 54. As the restart function, for example, in the first modification, there is a UE context validation processing function when an activation instruction is received from the eNB.
  • the UE context management unit 54 includes storage means such as a memory, and holds a UE context and a UE identifier (S-TMSI or the like) in the RRC idle state based on the instruction described in FIG. Further, in the procedures shown in FIG. 7, FIG. 26, etc., it is determined whether or not the UE context is held, and when the UE context is held, information indicating that the UE context is held is notified. The RRC processing unit 53 is instructed. Further, the UE context management unit 54 regards the held UE context as invalid when a predetermined time (T) has elapsed in the RRC idle state from the time when the RRC connected state has changed to the RRC idle state. , Including the ability to release the UE context.
  • T predetermined time
  • the UE context management unit 54 selects whether to release the UE context as invalid according to the radio access technology (for example, GSM (registered trademark), UMTS, LTE, etc.) of the cell to be reselected. Includes functionality. Further, when the radio access technology of the cell to be reselected is LTE, the UE context management unit 54 regards the UE context as invalid based on whether or not the eNB 10 supports the function of releasing the UE context, and releases the UE context. It includes a function to select whether or not to do.
  • the radio access technology for example, GSM (registered trademark), UMTS, LTE, etc.
  • the UE context management unit 54 when the UE context management unit 54 performs cell reselection with a RAT different from the current RAT while holding the UE context, the UE context management unit 54 is in a period until the RRC connection is established with the different RAT (in the cell to be reselected). Includes a function to release (delete) the UE context.
  • the configuration of the UE 50 shown in FIG. 46 may be entirely realized by a hardware circuit (eg, one or a plurality of IC chips), a part is constituted by a hardware circuit, and the other part is a CPU and a program. And may be realized.
  • a hardware circuit eg, one or a plurality of IC chips
  • a part is constituted by a hardware circuit
  • the other part is a CPU and a program. And may be realized.
  • FIG. 47 is a diagram illustrating an example of the hardware (HW) configuration of the UE 50.
  • FIG. 47 shows a configuration closer to the mounting example than FIG.
  • the UE 50 performs device control that performs processing such as an RE (Radio Equipment) module 151 that performs processing related to a radio signal, a BB (Base Band) processing module 152 that performs baseband signal processing, and higher layer processing. It has a module 153 and a USIM slot 154 which is an interface for accessing a USIM card.
  • RE Radio Equipment
  • BB Base Band
  • the RE module 151 should transmit from the antenna by performing D / A (Digital-to-Analog) conversion, modulation, frequency conversion, power amplification, etc. on the digital baseband signal received from the BB processing module 152 Generate a radio signal.
  • a digital baseband signal is generated by performing frequency conversion, A / D (Analog to Digital) conversion, demodulation, and the like on the received wireless signal, and the digital baseband signal is passed to the BB processing module 152.
  • the RE module 151 includes functions such as a physical layer in the DL signal receiving unit 51 and the UL signal transmitting unit 52 in FIG. 46, for example.
  • the BB processing module 152 performs processing for mutually converting an IP packet and a digital baseband signal.
  • a DSP (Digital Signal Processor) 162 is a processor that performs signal processing in the BB processing module 152.
  • the memory 172 is used as a work area for the DSP 162.
  • the BB processing module 152 includes, for example, functions such as layer 2 in the DL signal reception unit 51 and the UL signal transmission unit 52 in FIG. 46, an RRC processing unit 53, and a UE context management unit 54. Note that all or part of the functions of the RRC processing unit 53 and the UE context management unit 54 may be included in the device control module 153.
  • the device control module 153 performs IP layer protocol processing, various application processing, and the like.
  • the processor 163 is a processor that performs processing performed by the device control module 153.
  • the memory 173 is used as a work area for the processor 163.
  • the processor 163 reads and writes data with the USIM through the USIM slot 154.
  • FIG. 48 shows a functional configuration diagram of the base station eNB (eNB 10).
  • the eNB 10 includes a DL signal transmission unit 11, a UL signal reception unit 12, an RRC processing unit 13, a UE context management unit 14, an authentication unit 15, and an NW communication unit 16.
  • FIG. 48 shows only functional units that are particularly related to the embodiment of the present invention in the eNB 10, and the eNB 10 also has a function (not shown) for performing at least an operation based on the LTE scheme.
  • the DL signal transmission unit 11 includes a function of generating and transmitting various physical layer signals from upper layer information to be transmitted from the eNB 10.
  • the UL signal receiving unit 12 includes a function of receiving various uplink signals from the user apparatus UE and acquiring higher layer information from the received physical layer signals.
  • the UL signal receiving unit 12 includes a function for determining whether or not the UE 50 can support the DRB scheme / SRB scheme based on the LCID in the MAC header of the MAC PDU received from the UE 50.
  • the RRC processing unit 13 is described with reference to FIG. 7, FIG. 8, FIG. 10 to FIG. 41, and the like, determination processing on the eNB side, generation / transmission of RRC message and broadcast information (transmission is via the DL signal transmission unit 11). Transmission), interpretation of the RRC message received by the UL signal receiving unit 12, operations based on the interpretation, and the like are performed. Further, transmission / reception of the MAC signal in the random access procedure described with reference to FIGS. 38 to 40 may be performed by the DL signal transmission unit 11 and the UL signal reception unit 12.
  • the RRC processing unit 13 includes a function of resuming the RRC connection using the UE context held in the UE context management unit 14.
  • the UE context management unit 14 includes storage means such as a memory, and holds the UE context and the UE identifier (S-TMSI or the like) in the RRC idle state based on, for example, transmission of the instruction described in FIG.
  • the UE context is searched based on the UE identifier received from the UE, and after confirming that the UE context is retained, a notification indicating that the UE context is retained; Then, the RRC processing unit 13 is instructed to request authentication information. Further, in the first modification, the UE context management unit 14 instructs the authentication unit 15 to perform authentication based on the authentication information received from the UE.
  • the UE context management unit 14 searches for the UE context of the UE 50, and UE context Is confirmed, the RRC processing unit 13 is instructed to create and transmit a message for instructing the UE 50 to activate the UE context.
  • the UE context management unit 14 invalidates the held UE context when a predetermined time (T) elapses in the RRC idle state from the time when the UE 50 changes from the RRC connected state to the RRC idle state. And includes the function of releasing the UE context.
  • T predetermined time
  • the authentication unit 15 includes a function of receiving authentication information from the UE and authenticating the UE in Step 203 shown in FIG. Moreover, the authentication part 15 authenticates UE based on the authentication information transmitted from UE in the modification 201 in step 201 shown in FIG.
  • the NW communication unit 16 has a function of transmitting / receiving a control signal to / from the MME via the S1-MME interface, a function of transmitting / receiving data to / from the S-GW via the S1-U interface, and a function of transmitting a connection maintenance instruction signal , A transmission function for transmitting RRC connection establishment completion, and the like.
  • FIG. 49 shows a functional configuration diagram of the base station eNB (eNB 10) in the second modification.
  • eNB 10 base station eNB
  • FIG. 49 shows a functional configuration diagram of the base station eNB (eNB 10) in the second modification.
  • eNB 10 of FIG. 49 a UE context acquisition unit 17 is added to the configuration of FIG.
  • the RRC processing unit 13 executes the message transmission / reception operations in steps 453 to 455 and 471 to 474 shown in FIGS. 26 and 27 together with the DL signal transmission unit 11 and the UL signal reception unit 12, for example.
  • the UE context acquisition unit 17 executes the context acquisition procedure when the UE context necessary for establishing the RRC connection with the UE that holds the UE context is not stored in the UE context management unit 14. (Step 460 in FIG. 26, Steps 461 and 462 in FIG. 27). In addition, when receiving a context request message from another base station, the UE context acquisition unit 17 acquires the UE context from the UE context management unit 14 based on information identifying the target UE context, It has a function of returning to the other base station.
  • the configuration of the eNB 10 shown in FIGS. 48 and 47 may be entirely realized by a hardware circuit (eg, one or a plurality of IC chips), or a part may be configured by a hardware circuit and the other part may be a CPU. And a program.
  • a hardware circuit eg, one or a plurality of IC chips
  • a part may be configured by a hardware circuit and the other part may be a CPU.
  • a program e.g, one or a plurality of IC chips
  • FIG. 50 is a diagram illustrating an example of a hardware (HW) configuration of the eNB 10.
  • FIG. 50 shows a configuration closer to the mounting example than FIGS.
  • the eNB 10 is connected to the network by an RE module 251 that performs processing related to a radio signal, a BB processing module 252 that performs baseband signal processing, a device control module 253 that performs processing such as an upper layer, and the like.
  • a communication IF 254 which is an interface for this purpose.
  • the RE module 251 generates a radio signal to be transmitted from the antenna by performing D / A conversion, modulation, frequency conversion, power amplification, and the like on the digital baseband signal received from the BB processing module 252.
  • a digital baseband signal is generated by performing frequency conversion, A / D conversion, demodulation, and the like on the received radio signal, and passed to the BB processing module 252.
  • the RE module 251 includes functions such as a physical layer in the DL signal transmission unit 11 and the UL signal reception unit 12 in FIGS.
  • the BB processing module 252 performs processing for mutually converting an IP packet and a digital baseband signal.
  • the DSP 262 is a processor that performs signal processing in the BB processing module 252.
  • the memory 272 is used as a work area for the DSP 252.
  • the BB processing module 252 includes, for example, functions such as layer 2 in the DL signal transmission unit 11 and the UL signal reception unit 12 in FIGS. 48 and 47, an RRC processing unit 13, a UE context management unit 14, an authentication unit 15, and a UE context acquisition unit. 17 is included. Note that all or part of the functions of the RRC processing unit 13, the UE context management unit 14, the authentication unit 15, and the UE context acquisition unit 17 may be included in the device control module 253.
  • the device control module 253 performs IP layer protocol processing, OAM processing, and the like.
  • the processor 263 is a processor that performs processing performed by the device control module 253.
  • the memory 273 is used as a work area for the processor 263.
  • the auxiliary storage device 283 is an HDD, for example, and stores various setting information for the base station eNB itself to operate.
  • the configuration (functional category) of the apparatus shown in FIGS. 45 to 50 is merely an example of a configuration that realizes the processing described in the present embodiment (including the basic example and the first and second modifications). If the processing described in the present embodiment (including basic examples and modifications 1 and 2) can be realized, the mounting method (specific functional unit arrangement, names, etc.) is limited to a specific mounting method. Not.
  • the user apparatus in the mobile communication system that supports a function of establishing a connection by reusing context information held in each of the user apparatus and the base station, the user apparatus Transmitting means for transmitting to the base station a connection request message including first context holding information indicating that the device holds user apparatus side context information; and a base in which the base station is associated with the user apparatus.
  • the connection setting message includes a request for transmitting authentication information to the user apparatus in addition to the second context holding information, and the transmission means transmits authentication information to the base station based on the transmission request. It is good. With this configuration, the connection can be established after the base station authenticates the user apparatus.
  • the transmission means transmits, for example, a connection setting completion message including the authentication information to the base station.
  • the transmitting unit may transmit a connection request message including authentication information of the user device as the first context holding information to the base station.
  • authentication information can be transmitted before connection setting is performed (before RRC connection is made).
  • the reception unit may receive a connection setting message including instruction information for activating the user apparatus side context information as the second context holding information from the base station.
  • the user apparatus can determine whether or not the base station holds the context information based on whether or not the instruction information for activating the user apparatus side context information is received.
  • the receiving means receives from the base station a connection release message that causes the user apparatus to transition from a connected state to an idle state, and instructs to hold the user apparatus side context information from the connection release message In the idle state, the user device-side context information may be held in the storage unit.
  • the user device invalidates the user device side context information held in the storage unit when a predetermined time has passed in the idle state from the time when the user device transitioned from the connected state to the idle state. It is good also as providing the management means to do. With this configuration, for example, when the idle state continues for a long time, it is possible to avoid holding the user apparatus side context information.
  • the user apparatus side context information held in the storage unit is stored in accordance with the radio access technology of the cell selected to transition to the connected state again.
  • Management means for selecting whether or not to invalidate may be provided.
  • the user apparatus in the mobile communication system that supports a function of establishing a connection by reusing context information held in each of the user apparatus and the base station, the user apparatus Transmitting a connection request message including a first identifier indicating that the user apparatus side context information is held to the base station, and a connection setting message including a request for a second identifier.
  • a 1st identifier or a 2nd identifier is an identifier used in order to identify the base station which hold
  • the first identifier or the second identifier may include information for authenticating the user device corresponding to the context information.
  • the base station in the mobile communication system that supports a function of establishing a connection by reusing context information held in each of the user apparatus and the base station, wherein the user apparatus is a user
  • the base station receives a connection request message including the first context holding information indicating that the apparatus side context information is held.
  • the base station side context information is used to establish a connection with the user apparatus.
  • Base station is provided with a connection means.
  • the receiving unit acquires, for example, the identifier of the user apparatus from the connection request message, and searches the base station side context information corresponding to the identifier from the plurality of base station side context information held. In this way, by using the identifier, it is possible to reliably detect the base station side context information associated with the user apparatus.
  • the connection setting message includes, in addition to the second context holding information, a request for transmitting authentication information to the user device, and based on the transmission request, the user device using the authentication information transmitted from the user device. Authentication means for performing the authentication may be provided. With this configuration, the connection can be established after the base station authenticates the user apparatus.
  • the receiving unit may receive a connection request message including authentication information of the user device as the first context holding information from the user device.
  • the transmitting unit may transmit a connection setting message including instruction information for activating the user apparatus side context information as the second context holding information to the user apparatus.
  • the user apparatus can determine whether or not the base station holds the context information based on whether or not the instruction information for activating the user apparatus side context information is received.
  • the transmission means includes, in a connection release message for transitioning the user device from a connected state to an idle state, information instructing to hold the user device side context information, and sends the connection release message to the user device. It is good also as transmitting. With this configuration, when the user device does not receive an instruction, the user device does not need to hold the user device-side context information, and can avoid holding the user device-side context information unnecessarily.
  • the base station in the mobile communication system that supports the function of establishing the connection by reusing the context information held in each of the user apparatus and the base station
  • the user apparatus side context information Receiving means for receiving a connection request message including a first identifier from the user apparatus holding the terminal, transmitting means for transmitting a connection setting message including a request for a second identifier to the user apparatus, and from the user apparatus
  • a connection setting completion message including a second identifier is received, a holding base station holding the base station side context information of the user apparatus is specified based on the second identifier, and a context request message is sent to the holding base station
  • Base station is provided and a context acquisition means for acquiring context information.
  • the user apparatus in the mobile communication system that supports the function of establishing connection by reusing the context information held in each of the user apparatus and the base station, from the base station,
  • a receiving unit that receives instruction information indicating whether or not the base station has a context holding function, and determines whether the base station has a context holding function based on the instruction information received by the receiving unit
  • the determination unit and the determination unit determine that the base station has a context holding function
  • a user apparatus comprising transmission means for transmitting to the base station.
  • the base station retains the function of reusing context information in a mobile communication system that supports the function of reestablishing a connection by reusing context information retained in each of the user apparatus and the base station with the above configuration It becomes possible to determine whether or not by the user device.
  • the receiving means receives, for example, the instruction information included in broadcast information or a random access response.
  • the user apparatus can receive the instruction signal without introducing a new signal.
  • the transmission unit may transmit a connection request message including the context holding information to the base station.
  • the user apparatus in the mobile communication system that supports a function of establishing connection by reusing context information held in each of the user apparatus and the base station, wherein the user apparatus is a user
  • a connection request message including first context holding information indicating that the apparatus side context information is held is transmitted to the base station. Determining whether or not second context holding information indicating that base station side context information associated with the user apparatus is held is included, and the determination means includes the connection setting message.
  • the base station retains the function of reusing context information in a mobile communication system that supports the function of reestablishing a connection by reusing context information retained in each of the user apparatus and the base station with the above configuration It becomes possible to determine whether or not by the user device.
  • the base station in the mobile communication system that supports the function of establishing the connection by reusing the context information held in each of the user apparatus and the base station, the base station In the case where it is determined that the base station has a context holding function based on the instruction information in the transmission unit that transmits instruction information indicating whether or not to have a holding function to the user device, and the user device, There is provided a base station comprising receiving means for receiving, from the user apparatus, a message including context holding information indicating that the user apparatus holds user apparatus side context information.
  • the base station retains the function of reusing context information in a mobile communication system that supports the function of reestablishing a connection by reusing context information retained in each of the user apparatus and the base station with the above configuration It becomes possible to determine whether or not by the user device.
  • the transmission means transmits, for example, broadcast information including the instruction information or a random access response to the user device.
  • the user apparatus can receive the instruction signal without introducing a new signal.
  • the receiving unit may receive a connection request message including the context holding information from the user device.
  • a base station that has been confirmed to have a function of reusing context information can receive a connection request message, and a connection can be reliably established by reusing context information.
  • the embodiment described above can be further described as the following supplementary notes.
  • Appendix 1 The user apparatus in a mobile communication system that supports a function of establishing connection by reusing context information held in each of a user apparatus and a base station, Transmitting means for transmitting to the base station a connection request message including first context holding information indicating that the user apparatus holds user apparatus side context information; Receiving means for receiving, from the base station, a connection setting message including second context holding information indicating that the base station holds base station side context information associated with the user apparatus;
  • a user apparatus comprising: a connection unit that establishes a connection with the base station using the context information on the user apparatus side after receiving the connection setting message.
  • connection setting message includes a request for transmitting authentication information to the user apparatus in addition to the second context holding information, and the transmission means transmits authentication information to the base station based on the transmission request.
  • the user apparatus according to appendix 1 characterized by: [Appendix 3] The user apparatus according to supplementary note 2, wherein the transmission unit transmits a connection setting completion message including the authentication information to the base station.
  • [Appendix 5] The user apparatus according to appendix 1, wherein the reception unit receives a connection setting message including instruction information for activating the user apparatus side context information as the second context holding information from the base station.
  • the receiving means receives from the base station a connection release message that causes the user apparatus to transition from a connected state to an idle state, and instructs to hold the user apparatus side context information from the connection release message.
  • the user device according to any one of appendices 1 to 5, wherein the user device-side context information is held in a storage unit during the idle state.
  • the user device characterized by: [Appendix 8]
  • the user apparatus side context information held in the storage unit is invalidated according to the radio access technology of the cell selected to transition to the connected state again.
  • the base station in a mobile communication system that supports a function of establishing a connection by reusing context information held in each of a user apparatus and a base station, Receiving means for receiving, from the user device, a connection request message including first context holding information indicating that the user device holds user device side context information; In response to receiving the connection request message, a connection setting message including second context holding information indicating that the base station holds base station side context information associated with the user apparatus, Transmitting means for transmitting to the user device;
  • a base station comprising: connection means for establishing a connection with the user apparatus using the base station side context information after transmitting the connection setting message.
  • the receiving means acquires an identifier of the user apparatus from the connection request message, and searches base station side context information corresponding to the identifier from a plurality of base station side context information held.
  • the connection setting message includes a request for transmitting authentication information to the user device in addition to the second context holding information,
  • the base station according to appendix 9 or 10 further comprising: an authenticating unit that authenticates the user device using authentication information transmitted from the user device based on the transmission request.
  • the base station according to appendix 9, wherein the receiving unit receives a connection request message including authentication information of the user device as the first context holding information from the user device.
  • the base station according to appendix 9, wherein the transmission means transmits a connection setting message including instruction information for activating the user apparatus side context information as the second context holding information to the user apparatus.
  • the transmission means includes, in a connection release message for transitioning the user device from a connected state to an idle state, information instructing to hold the user device side context information, and sends the connection release message to the user device.
  • the base station according to any one of appendices 9 to 13, wherein the base station transmits.
  • a connection establishment method executed by the base station in a mobile communication system that supports a function of establishing connection by reusing context information held in each of a user apparatus and a base station, Receiving a connection request message including first context holding information indicating that the user device holds user device side context information from the user device; In response to receiving the connection request message, a connection setting message including second context holding information indicating that the base station holds base station side context information associated with the user apparatus, A transmitting step for transmitting to the user device; A connection establishing method comprising: a connection step of establishing a connection with the user apparatus using the base station side context information after transmitting the connection setting message.
  • the operations of a plurality of functional units may be physically performed by one component, or the operations of one functional unit may be physically performed by a plurality of components.
  • each device has been described using a functional block diagram. However, such a device may be implemented in hardware, software, or a combination thereof.
  • Software that is operated by the processor of the apparatus according to the embodiment of the present invention includes random access memory (RAM), flash memory, read only memory (ROM), EPROM, EEPROM, register, hard disk (HDD), removable disk, CD It may be stored in any suitable storage medium such as ROM, database, server, etc.
  • UE context management unit 15 Authentication unit 16 NW communication unit 17 UE context acquisition unit 30 MME 31 eNB communication unit 32 SGW communication unit 33 communication control unit 40 S-GW 41 eNB communication unit 42 MME communication unit 43 NW communication unit 44 communication control unit 50 UE 51 DL signal reception unit 52 UL signal transmission unit 53 RRC processing unit 54 UE context management unit 151 RE module 152 BB processing module 153 device control module 154 USIM slot 251 RE module 252 BB processing module 253 device control module 254 Communication IF

Abstract

A user device in a mobile communication system that supports a connection establishment function that involves reusing context information stored in the user device and a base station, the user device being equipped with: a transmission means for transmitting, to the base station, a first message indicating that the user device is storing user device-side context information; a receiving means for receiving, from the base station, a second message indicating that the base station is storing base station-side context information associated with the user device; and a connection means for establishing a connection with the base station by using the user device-side context information after receiving the second message.

Description

ユーザ装置、基地局、及び接続確立方法User apparatus, base station, and connection establishment method
 本発明は、移動通信システムにおけるユーザ装置UEと基地局eNBのそれぞれが、UEコンテクストを保持する技術に関連するものである。 The present invention relates to a technology in which each of the user equipment UE and the base station eNB in the mobile communication system holds a UE context.
 LTEシステムにおいて、ユーザ装置UE(以下、UEと記述する)における基地局eNB(以下、eNBと記述する)との間の接続状態はRRC(Radio Resource Control)アイドル状態(RRC_Idle)と、RRC接続状態(RRC_Connected)の2つで示される。 In the LTE system, a connection state between a user apparatus UE (hereinafter referred to as UE) and a base station eNB (hereinafter referred to as eNB) is an RRC (Radio Resource Control) idle state (RRC_Idle) and an RRC connection state. (RRC_Connected).
 UEがネットワークに接続する際に、コアNW側のMME(Mobility Management Entity)によりUEコンテクストが生成され、RRC接続状態において、当該UEコンテクストはUEが接続するeNB及びUEに保持される。なお、UEコンテクストは、ベアラ関連情報、セキュリティ関連情報等を含む情報である。 When the UE connects to the network, a UE context is generated by MME (Mobility Management Entity) on the core NW side, and in the RRC connection state, the UE context is held in the eNB and the UE to which the UE is connected. The UE context is information including bearer related information, security related information, and the like.
 UEがRRCアイドル状態とRRC接続状態との間を遷移する際に、コアNW側も含めた呼制御のシグナリングが多く発生するため、シグナリングを如何にして削減するかが課題となっている。 When the UE transitions between the RRC idle state and the RRC connection state, a lot of call control signaling including the core NW side is generated, so how to reduce the signaling is a problem.
 例えば、UEをRRC接続状態からRRCアイドル状態に遷移させる際には、図1に示すようなシグナリングが発生する(非特許文献1等)。図1のケースは、eNB2が、UE1の通信が所定時間発生しないことを検知し、UE1との接続を切断して、RRCアイドル状態に遷移させるようなケースである。 For example, when the UE transitions from the RRC connected state to the RRC idle state, signaling as shown in FIG. 1 occurs (Non-Patent Document 1, etc.). The case of FIG. 1 is a case where the eNB 2 detects that the communication of the UE 1 does not occur for a predetermined time, disconnects the connection with the UE 1, and transitions to the RRC idle state.
 図1において、eNB2が、UEコンテクスト解放要求(UE Context Release Request)をMME3に送信する(ステップ1)。MME3は、ベアラ解放要求(Release Access Bearers Request)をS-GW4に送信し(ステップ2)、S-GW4はベアラ解放応答(Release Access Bearers Response)をMME3に返す(ステップ3)。 1, eNB 2 transmits a UE context release request (UE 解放 Context Release Request) to MME 3 (step 1). The MME 3 transmits a bearer release request (Release Access Bearers request) to the S-GW 4 (step 2), and the S-GW 4 returns a bearer release response (Release Access Bearers response) to the MME 3 (step 3).
 MME3は、UEコンテクスト解放指示(UE Context Release Command)をeNB2に送信する(ステップ4)。eNB2は、RRC接続解放(RRC Connection Release)をUE1に送信し(ステップ5)、UE1に対してUEコンテクストを解放させて、RRCアイドル状態に遷移させる。また、eNB2はUEコンテクストを解放し、UEコンテクスト解放完了(UE Context Release Complete)をMME3に送信する(ステップ6)。 The MME 3 transmits a UE context release instruction (UE Context Release Command) to the eNB 2 (step 4). eNB2 transmits RRC connection release (RRC Connection Release) to UE1 (step 5), causes UE1 to release the UE context, and transitions to the RRC idle state. Moreover, eNB2 releases UE context and transmits UE context release completion (UE | Context | Release | Complete) to MME3 (step 6).
 図1に示すようなシグナリング手順では、RRC接続解放時に多くのシグナリングが発生するのみならず、UEがRRCアイドル状態から再びRRC接続状態に遷移する際に、UEコンテクストの設定のために多くのシグナリングが発生する。 In the signaling procedure as shown in FIG. 1, not only a large amount of signaling occurs when the RRC connection is released, but also when the UE transitions from the RRC idle state to the RRC connected state again, a large amount of signaling is required for setting the UE context. Will occur.
 UEがRRCアイドル状態とRRC接続状態との間を遷移する際のシグナリングを削減するために、UEが同一eNB内でRRC接続状態‐>RRCアイドル状態->RRC接続状態と遷移する場合に、UEコンテクストをeNB及びUEで保持したままにしておき、再利用する方法が検討され始めている(非特許文献2)。当該方法において考えられる手順の例を図2を参照して説明する。 To reduce signaling when the UE transitions between the RRC idle state and the RRC connected state, when the UE transitions from the RRC connected state-> RRC idle state-> RRC connected state within the same eNB, the UE A method of keeping the context in the eNB and UE and reusing it has begun to be studied (Non-Patent Document 2). An example of a procedure conceivable in the method will be described with reference to FIG.
 図2の(a)に示す状態は、UE1がRRC接続状態にあり、コアNW側において、当該UE1に係るS1-CのコネクションとS1-Uのコネクション(図ではS1‐C/U)が確立されている状態である。なお、S1-Cのコネクションは、C-plane信号を送るS1コネクションであり、S1-UのコネクションはU-planeを通すS1コネクションである。 In the state shown in FIG. 2A, UE1 is in the RRC connection state, and the S1-C connection and the S1-U connection (S1-C / U in the figure) related to the UE1 are established on the core NW side. It is a state that has been. The S1-C connection is an S1 connection that sends a C-plane signal, and the S1-U connection is an S1 connection that passes a U-plane.
 (a)に示す状態から、(b)、(c)に示すように、RRC接続解放(RRC Connection Release)によりUE1がRRCアイドル状態に遷移される。このとき、eNB2におけるUE1に対するUEコンテクストは保持されたままであり、また、UE1におけるeNB2に対するUEコンテクストも保持されたままであり、UE1に対するS1‐C/Uコネクションも維持されたままである。そして、(d)に示すように、UE1がRRC接続状態に遷移する際に、eNB2とUE1は保持しておいたUEコンテクストを再利用することで、シグナリングを削減して、RRC接続を確立する。 From the state shown in (a), as shown in (b) and (c), UE1 is transitioned to the RRC idle state by RRC connection release (RRC Connection Release). At this time, the UE context for UE1 in eNB2 is maintained, the UE context for eNB2 in UE1 is also maintained, and the S1-C / U connection for UE1 is also maintained. Then, as shown in (d), when UE1 transitions to the RRC connection state, eNB2 and UE1 reuse the UE context that has been retained, thereby reducing signaling and establishing an RRC connection. .
 ここで、図2の(d)に示すケースにおいては、UE1とeNB2が、それぞれ保持したUEコンテクストを用いてRRC接続確立が行われる例を示しているが、一般には、eNB配下のセルには、多数のUEが存在し、eNBは各UEが、当該eNBとの接続に利用できるUEコンテクストを保持しているかどうかわからない。 Here, in the case shown in (d) of FIG. 2, UE1 and eNB2 show examples in which RRC connection establishment is performed using the retained UE contexts. There are a large number of UEs, and the eNB does not know whether each UE has a UE context that can be used for connection with the eNB.
 例えば、図3に示すように、eNB_Bとの接続で利用したUEコンテクストを保持するUE6がRRCアイドル状態のままeNB_Aに移動した場合において、eNB_AはUE6がeNB_Aとの接続に利用できるUEコンテクストを保持しているのかどうか不明である。 For example, as shown in FIG. 3, when the UE 6 that holds the UE context used in the connection with the eNB_B moves to the eNB_A in the RRC idle state, the eNB_A holds the UE context that the UE 6 can use for the connection with the eNB_A. It is unclear whether or not
 このような場合を考慮して、例えば、eNB_Aは、eNB_Aのセルに在圏する全てのUEがeNB_Aに対するUEコンテクストを保持するものと仮定して、UEコンテクストを再利用した接続手順を試みることが考えられる。しかし、この場合、eNB_Aに対するUEコンテクストを保持しないUEとの接続手順は失敗し、UEコンテクストを再利用しない通常の接続手順を再度実行することになり、遅延が生じる可能性がある。 Considering such a case, for example, the eNB_A may attempt a connection procedure that reuses the UE context, assuming that all UEs located in the cell of the eNB_A hold the UE context for the eNB_A. Conceivable. However, in this case, the connection procedure with the UE that does not hold the UE context for eNB_A fails, and the normal connection procedure that does not reuse the UE context is executed again, which may cause a delay.
 本発明は上記の点に鑑みてなされたものであり、ユーザ装置と基地局のそれぞれに保持されるコンテクスト情報を再利用して接続確立を行う機能をサポートする移動通信システムにおいて、ユーザ装置がコンテクスト情報を保持しているか否かを基地局により判定することを可能とする技術を提供することを目的とする。 The present invention has been made in view of the above points. In a mobile communication system that supports a function of establishing a connection by reusing context information held in each of a user apparatus and a base station, the user apparatus has a context. It is an object of the present invention to provide a technique that enables a base station to determine whether or not information is held.
 本発明の実施の形態によれば、ユーザ装置と基地局のそれぞれに保持されるコンテクスト情報を再利用して接続確立を行う機能をサポートする移動通信システムにおける前記ユーザ装置であって、
 前記ユーザ装置がユーザ装置側コンテクスト情報を保持していることを示す第1のメッセージを、前記基地局に送信する送信手段と、
 前記基地局が前記ユーザ装置に対応付けられた基地局側コンテクスト情報を保持していることを示す第2のメッセージを、前記基地局から受信する受信手段と、
 前記第2のメッセージを受信した後、前記ユーザ装置側コンテクスト情報を利用して、前記基地局との間で接続を確立する接続手段と
 を備えることを特徴とするユーザ装置が提供される。
According to an embodiment of the present invention, the user apparatus in a mobile communication system supporting a function of establishing a connection by reusing context information held in each of the user apparatus and the base station,
Transmitting means for transmitting to the base station a first message indicating that the user apparatus holds user apparatus side context information;
Receiving means for receiving, from the base station, a second message indicating that the base station holds the base station side context information associated with the user apparatus;
After receiving the second message, there is provided a user apparatus comprising: connection means for establishing a connection with the base station using the user apparatus side context information.
 また、本発明の実施の形態によれば、ユーザ装置と基地局のそれぞれに保持されるコンテクスト情報を再利用して接続確立を行う機能をサポートする移動通信システムにおける前記基地局であって、
 前記ユーザ装置がユーザ装置側コンテクスト情報を保持していることを示す第1のメッセージを、前記ユーザ装置から受信する受信手段と、
 前記第1のメッセージを受信したことに応じて、前記基地局が前記ユーザ装置に対応付けられた基地局側コンテクスト情報を保持していることを示す第2のメッセージを、前記ユーザ装置に送信する送信手段と、
 前記第2のメッセージを送信した後、前記基地局側コンテクスト情報を利用して、前記ユーザ装置との間で接続を確立する接続手段と
 を備えることを特徴とする基地局が提供される。
Further, according to the embodiment of the present invention, the base station in the mobile communication system that supports a function of establishing a connection by reusing context information held in each of the user apparatus and the base station,
Receiving means for receiving, from the user device, a first message indicating that the user device holds user device-side context information;
In response to receiving the first message, a second message indicating that the base station holds the base station side context information associated with the user apparatus is transmitted to the user apparatus. A transmission means;
After transmitting the second message, there is provided a base station comprising connection means for establishing a connection with the user apparatus using the base station side context information.
 また、本発明の実施の形態によれば、ユーザ装置と基地局のそれぞれに保持されるコンテクスト情報を再利用して接続確立を行う機能をサポートする移動通信システムにおける前記ユーザ装置が実行する接続確立方法であって、
 前記ユーザ装置がユーザ装置側コンテクスト情報を保持していることを示す第1のメッセージを、前記基地局に送信する送信ステップと、
 前記基地局が前記ユーザ装置に対応付けられた基地局側コンテクスト情報を保持していることを示す第2のメッセージを、前記基地局から受信する受信ステップと、
 前記第2のメッセージを受信した後、前記ユーザ装置側コンテクスト情報を利用して、前記基地局との間で接続を確立する接続ステップと
 を備えることを特徴とする接続確立方法が提供される。
In addition, according to the embodiment of the present invention, connection establishment performed by the user apparatus in a mobile communication system that supports a function of establishing connection by reusing context information held in each of the user apparatus and the base station. A method,
A transmission step of transmitting to the base station a first message indicating that the user apparatus holds user apparatus side context information;
A receiving step of receiving, from the base station, a second message indicating that the base station holds the base station side context information associated with the user device;
After receiving the second message, there is provided a connection establishment method comprising: a connection step of establishing a connection with the base station using the user apparatus side context information.
 また、本発明の実施の形態によれば、ユーザ装置と基地局のそれぞれに保持されるコンテクスト情報を再利用して接続確立を行う機能をサポートする移動通信システムにおける前記基地局が実行する接続確立方法であって、
 前記ユーザ装置がユーザ装置側コンテクスト情報を保持していることを示す第1のメッセージを、前記ユーザ装置から受信する受信ステップと、
 前記第1のメッセージを受信したことに応じて、前記基地局が前記ユーザ装置に対応付けられた基地局側コンテクスト情報を保持していることを示す第2のメッセージを、前記ユーザ装置に送信する送信ステップと、
 前記第2のメッセージを送信した後、前記基地局側コンテクスト情報を利用して、前記ユーザ装置との間で接続を確立する接続ステップと
 を備えることを特徴とする接続確立方法が提供される。
Further, according to the embodiment of the present invention, connection establishment performed by the base station in a mobile communication system that supports a function of establishing connection by reusing context information held in each of the user apparatus and the base station A method,
A receiving step of receiving, from the user device, a first message indicating that the user device holds user device-side context information;
In response to receiving the first message, a second message indicating that the base station holds the base station side context information associated with the user apparatus is transmitted to the user apparatus. Sending step;
After transmitting the second message, there is provided a connection establishment method comprising: a connection step of establishing a connection with the user apparatus using the base station side context information.
 本発明の実施の形態によれば、ユーザ装置と基地局のそれぞれに保持されるコンテクスト情報を再利用して接続確立を行う機能をサポートする移動通信システムにおいて、ユーザ装置がコンテクスト情報を保持しているか否かを基地局により判定することを可能とする技術が提供される。 According to an embodiment of the present invention, in a mobile communication system that supports a function of establishing a connection by reusing context information held in each of a user apparatus and a base station, the user apparatus holds the context information. There is provided a technique that enables a base station to determine whether or not there is.
RRCアイドル状態に遷移する場合のシグナリングシーケンス例を示す図である。It is a figure which shows the example of a signaling sequence in the case of changing to a RRC idle state. UEコンテクストを保持する場合の処理の例を説明するための図である。It is a figure for demonstrating the example of the process in the case of hold | maintaining UE context. 課題を説明するための図である。It is a figure for demonstrating a subject. 本発明の実施の形態における通信システムの構成図である。It is a block diagram of the communication system in embodiment of this invention. 本実施の形態におけるシステム全体の処理シーケンスの例を示す図である。It is a figure which shows the example of the process sequence of the whole system in this Embodiment. 本実施の形態におけるシステム全体の処理シーケンスの他の例を示す図である。It is a figure which shows the other example of the process sequence of the whole system in this Embodiment. 本実施の形態における接続確立手順を説明するための図である。It is a figure for demonstrating the connection establishment procedure in this Embodiment. 本実施の形態における接続解放手順を説明するための図である。It is a figure for demonstrating the connection release procedure in this Embodiment. システム全体の処理シーケンスの他の例を示す図である。It is a figure which shows the other example of the process sequence of the whole system. RRCConnectionRequest messageの仕様変更例1を示す図である。It is a figure which shows the specification modification example 1 of RRCConnectionRequest | message. RRCConnectionRequest messageの仕様変更例1を示す図である。It is a figure which shows the specification modification example 1 of RRCConnectionRequest | message. RRCConnectionSetup messageの仕様変更例1を示す図である。It is a figure which shows the example 1 of specification change of RRCConnectionSetup | message. RRCConnectionSetup messageの仕様変更例1を示す図である。It is a figure which shows the example 1 of specification change of RRCConnectionSetup | message. RRCConnectionSetupComplete messageの仕様変更例1を示す図である。It is a figure which shows the example 1 of specification change of RRCConnectionSetupComplete | message. RRCConnectionRelease messageの仕様変更例1を示す図である。It is a figure which shows the example 1 of specification change of RRCConnectionRelease message. RRCConnectionRelease messageの仕様変更例1を示す図である。It is a figure which shows the example 1 of specification change of RRCConnectionRelease message. RRCConnectionRelease messageの仕様変更例2を示す図である。It is a figure which shows the example 2 of specification change of RRCConnectionRelease message. RRCConnectionRelease messageの仕様変更例2を示す図である。It is a figure which shows the example 2 of specification change of RRCConnectionRelease message. RRCConnectionRequest messageの送信時の動作に関する仕様変更例を示す図である。It is a figure which shows the example of a specification change regarding the operation | movement at the time of transmission of RRCConnectionRequest | message. RRCConnectionRequest messageの仕様変更例2を示す図である。It is a figure which shows the example 2 of specification change of RRCConnectionRequest | message. RRCConnectionRequest messageの仕様変更例2を示す図である。It is a figure which shows the example 2 of specification change of RRCConnectionRequest | message. RRCConnectionSetup messageの受信時の動作に関する仕様変更例を示す図である。It is a figure which shows the example of a specification change regarding the operation | movement at the time of reception of RRCConnectionSetup | message. RRCConnectionSetup messageの仕様変更例2を示す図である。It is a figure which shows the example 2 of specification change of RRCConnectionSetup | message. RRCConnectionSetup messageの仕様変更例2を示す図である。It is a figure which shows the example 2 of specification change of RRCConnectionSetup | message. Option 1に対応するRRC connection Reject受信時のUE動作の仕様変更例を示す図である。It is a figure which shows the example of a specification change of UE operation | movement at the time of RRC | connection * Reject reception corresponding to Option * 1. Option 2に対応するRRC connection Reject受信時のUE動作の仕様変更例を示す図である。It is a figure which shows the example of a specification change of UE operation | movement at the time of RRC (connection) Reject corresponding to Option (2). Option 1に対応するRRC connection Reject messageの仕様変更例を示す図である。It is a figure which shows the example of a specification change of RRC (connection) Reject (message) corresponding to Option (1). Option 1に対応するRRC connection Reject messageの仕様変更例を示す図である。It is a figure which shows the example of a specification change of RRC (connection) Reject (message) corresponding to Option (1). Option 2に対応するRRC connection Reject messageの仕様変更例を示す図である。It is a figure which shows the example of a specification change of RRC (connection) Reject (message) corresponding to Option (2). Option 2に対応するRRC connection Reject messageの仕様変更例を示す図である。It is a figure which shows the example of a specification change of RRC (connection) Reject (message) corresponding to Option (2). RRCConnectionRelease messageの仕様変更例3を示す図である。It is a figure which shows the example 3 of specification change of RRCConnectionRelease message. RRCConnectionRelease messageの仕様変更例3を示す図である。It is a figure which shows the example 3 of specification change of RRCConnectionRelease message. RRCConnectionRelease messageの受信時の動作に関する仕様変更例を示す図である。It is a figure which shows the example of a specification change regarding the operation | movement at the time of reception of RRCConnectionRelease message. UEコンテンクスト保持のための変数に関する仕様変更例を示す図である。It is a figure which shows the example of a specification change regarding the variable for UE content holding. eNBの特定情報を通知する方法の例を示す説明するための図である。It is a figure for demonstrating the example of the method of notifying the specific information of eNB. コンテクスト取得手順例を示す図である。It is a figure which shows the example of a context acquisition procedure. RRCConnectionRequest messageの仕様変更例3を示す図である。It is a figure which shows the example 3 of specification change of RRCConnectionRequest | message. RRCConnectionRequest messageの仕様変更例3を示す図である。It is a figure which shows the example 3 of specification change of RRCConnectionRequest | message. RRCConnectionSetup messageの仕様変更例3を示す図である。It is a figure which shows the example 3 of specification change of RRCConnectionSetup | message. RRCConnectionSetup messageの仕様変更例3を示す図である。It is a figure which shows the example 3 of specification change of RRCConnectionSetup | message. RRCConnectionSetupComplete messageの仕様変更例2を示す図である。It is a figure which shows the example 2 of a specification change of RRCConnectionSetupComplete | message. RRCConnectionSetupComplete messageの仕様変更例2を示す図である。It is a figure which shows the example 2 of a specification change of RRCConnectionSetupComplete | message. RRCConnectionRequest messageの仕様変更例4を示す図である。It is a figure which shows the example 4 of specification change of RRCConnectionRequest | message. RRCConnectionRequest messageの仕様変更例4を示す図である。It is a figure which shows the example 4 of specification change of RRCConnectionRequest | message. RRCConnectionSetupComplete messageの仕様変更例3を示す図である。It is a figure which shows the example 3 of specification change of RRCConnectionSetupComplete | message. RRCConnectionSetupComplete messageの仕様変更例3を示す図である。It is a figure which shows the example 3 of specification change of RRCConnectionSetupComplete | message. RRCConnectionRequest messageの仕様変更例5を示す図である。It is a figure which shows the example 5 of a specification change of RRCConnectionRequest | message. RRCConnectionRequest messageの仕様変更例5を示す図である。It is a figure which shows the example 5 of a specification change of RRCConnectionRequest | message. RRCConnectionSetupComplete messageの仕様変更例4を示す図である。It is a figure which shows the example 4 of a specification change of RRCConnectionSetupComplete | message. RRCConnectionSetupComplete messageの仕様変更例4を示す図である。It is a figure which shows the example 4 of a specification change of RRCConnectionSetupComplete | message. RRCConnectionRequest messageの仕様変更例6を示す図である。It is a figure which shows the specification modification example 6 of RRCConnectionRequest | message. RRCConnectionRequest messageの仕様変更例6を示す図である。It is a figure which shows the specification modification example 6 of RRCConnectionRequest | message. RRCConnectionSetupComplete messageの仕様変更例5を示す図である。It is a figure which shows the example 5 of a specification change of RRCConnectionSetupComplete | message. RRCConnectionSetupComplete messageの仕様変更例5を示す図である。It is a figure which shows the example 5 of a specification change of RRCConnectionSetupComplete | message. UEの動作例を説明するためのフローチャートである。It is a flowchart for demonstrating the operation example of UE. UEの動作例を説明するためのフローチャートである。It is a flowchart for demonstrating the operation example of UE. RA Responseのメッセージ例を示す図である。It is a figure which shows the example of a message of RA Response. RA Responseのメッセージ例を示す図である。It is a figure which shows the example of a message of RA Response. UEの動作例を説明するためのフローチャートである。It is a flowchart for demonstrating the operation example of UE. LCIDに関する仕様変更例を示す図である。It is a figure which shows the example of a specification change regarding LCID. LCIDに関する仕様変更例を示す図である。It is a figure which shows the example of a specification change regarding LCID. UEコンテクストの保持に関する仕様変更例を示す図である。It is a figure which shows the example of a specification change regarding holding | maintenance of UE context. UEコンテクストの保持に関する仕様変更例を示す図である。It is a figure which shows the example of a specification change regarding holding | maintenance of UE context. MMEとS-GWの構成図である。It is a block diagram of MME and S-GW. UE50の構成図である。It is a block diagram of UE50. UE50のHW構成図である。It is a HW block diagram of UE50. eNB10の構成図である。It is a block diagram of eNB10. eNB10の構成図である。It is a block diagram of eNB10. eNB10のHW構成図である。It is a HW block diagram of eNB10.
 以下、図面を参照して本発明の実施の形態を説明する。なお、以下で説明する実施の形態は一例に過ぎず、本発明が適用される実施の形態は、以下の実施の形態に限られるわけではない。例えば、本実施の形態では、LTEのシステムを対象としているが、本発明はLTEに限らずに適用可能である。また、本明細書及び特許請求の範囲では、特に断らない限り、「LTE」の用語は3GPPの特定のRel(リリース)に限定されない。 Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings. The embodiment described below is only an example, and the embodiment to which the present invention is applied is not limited to the following embodiment. For example, in the present embodiment, an LTE system is targeted, but the present invention is not limited to LTE and can be applied. Further, in the present specification and claims, the term “LTE” is not limited to a specific Rel (release) of 3GPP unless otherwise specified.
 (システム全体構成)
 図4は、本発明の実施の形態における通信システムの構成例を示す図である。図4に示すように、本実施の形態の通信システムは、eNB10、eNB20、MME30、S-GW(Serving Gateway)40、UE50を含む。なお、図4は、コアネットワーク(EPC)に関して、本実施の形態に関連する部分のみを示している。
(Whole system configuration)
FIG. 4 is a diagram showing a configuration example of a communication system in the embodiment of the present invention. As illustrated in FIG. 4, the communication system according to the present embodiment includes an eNB 10, an eNB 20, an MME 30, an S-GW (Serving Gateway) 40, and a UE 50. FIG. 4 shows only the part related to the present embodiment regarding the core network (EPC).
 UE50は携帯電話機等のユーザ装置である。eNB10、20はそれぞれ基地局である。MME30は、eNBを収容し、位置登録、ページング、ハンドオーバ等のモビリティ制御、ベアラ確立/削除等を行うノード装置である。S-GW40は、ユーザデータ(U-Planeデータ)の中継を行うノード装置である。なお、MME30とS-GW40からなるシステムを通信制御装置と呼ぶ。また、MME30とS-GW40を1つの装置で構成し、それを通信制御装置と呼ぶこととしてもよい。 UE 50 is a user device such as a mobile phone. Each of the eNBs 10 and 20 is a base station. The MME 30 is a node device that accommodates the eNB and performs location control, mobility control such as paging and handover, bearer establishment / deletion, and the like. The S-GW 40 is a node device that relays user data (U-Plane data). A system composed of the MME 30 and the S-GW 40 is called a communication control device. Alternatively, the MME 30 and the S-GW 40 may be configured as a single device and referred to as a communication control device.
 図4に示すように、MME30とeNB10、20間はS1-MMEインターフェースで接続され、S-GW40とeNB10、20間はS1-Uインターフェースで接続される。点線の接続線は制御信号インターフェースを示し、実線の接続線はユーザデータ転送のインターフェースを示す。 As shown in FIG. 4, the MME 30 and the eNBs 10 and 20 are connected via the S1-MME interface, and the S-GW 40 and the eNBs 10 and 20 are connected via the S1-U interface. A dotted connection line indicates a control signal interface, and a solid connection line indicates a user data transfer interface.
 本実施の形態では、前述したように、UE50が同一eNB内でRRC接続状態からRRCアイドル状態に遷移する場合でも、当該eNBにおいてUE50のUEコンテクストが保持されるとともに、UE50にも当該eNBとの接続に係るUEコンテクストが保持される方式を前提とする。前述したように、この方式は、シグナリング数削減を可能とする方式である。 In the present embodiment, as described above, even when the UE 50 transitions from the RRC connected state to the RRC idle state in the same eNB, the UE context of the UE 50 is held in the eNB, and the UE 50 also has the eNB. It is assumed that the UE context related to the connection is maintained. As described above, this method is a method that enables the number of signaling to be reduced.
 (全体のシーケンス例)
 まず、本実施の形態における通信システム全体のシーケンス例として、RRCアイドル状態のUE50に対する着信がある場合に、MME30からページングを行う方式について説明する。より具体的には、UE50がeNB10に接続してRRC接続状態となり、eNB10の配下のセルでRRCアイドル状態となり、同一セルで、その後に着信を受ける場合の処理シーケンスを図5を参照して説明する。
(Overall sequence example)
First, as a sequence example of the entire communication system in the present embodiment, a method of paging from the MME 30 when there is an incoming call to the UE 50 in the RRC idle state will be described. More specifically, the processing sequence in the case where the UE 50 connects to the eNB 10 and enters the RRC connection state, enters the RRC idle state in the cell under the control of the eNB 10, and receives an incoming call later in the same cell will be described with reference to FIG. To do.
 図5の処理の前提として、UE50はeNB10のセルにおいてRRC接続状態にあり、UE50に関するS1-C/Uのコネクションが確立されている状態とする。図5において、S1-Cコネクションは、eNB10とMME30との間のコネクションとMME30とS-GW40間のコネクションを含み、S1-Uコネクションは、eNB10とS-GW40間のコネクションを含む。コネクションが確立されている場合、コネクション確立信号等のコネクションセットアップのための手順を実行することなく、該当ノード装置間でUE50に係る信号(データ)を送受信できる。 As a premise of the processing in FIG. 5, the UE 50 is in an RRC connection state in the cell of the eNB 10 and an S1-C / U connection related to the UE 50 is established. In FIG. 5, the S1-C connection includes a connection between the eNB 10 and the MME 30 and a connection between the MME 30 and the S-GW 40, and the S1-U connection includes a connection between the eNB 10 and the S-GW 40. When the connection is established, a signal (data) related to the UE 50 can be transmitted / received between the corresponding node devices without executing a procedure for connection setup such as a connection establishment signal.
 図5の手順の説明に入る前に、UE50が最初にeNB10に接続する際の手順の一例の概要を説明しておく(非特許文献3)。UE50のランダムアクセス時に、eNB10は、RRC Connection SetupをUE50に送信し、UE50をRRC接続状態とし、UE50からRRC Connection Setup Completeを受信する。その後、eNB10は、MME30からInitial Context Setup Requestを受信し、UE50に対してRRC Security Mode Commandを送信し、UE50からRRC Security Mode Completeを受信し、また、UE50に対してRRC Connection Reconfigurationを送信し、UE50からRRC Connection Reconfiguration Completeを受信し、MME30に対してInitial Context Setup Responseを送信する。このような手順を経て、UE50とeNB10におけるUEコンテクストの確立、保持等がなされる。 Before entering the description of the procedure in FIG. 5, an outline of an example of a procedure when the UE 50 first connects to the eNB 10 will be described (Non-Patent Document 3). During random access of the UE 50, the eNB 10 transmits RRC 送信 Connection Setup to the UE 50, sets the UE 50 to the RRC connection state, and receives RRC Connection Setup Complete from the UE 50. Thereafter, the eNB 10 receives an Initial Context Setup Request from the MME 30, transmits an RRC Security Mode to the UE 50, receives an RRC Security Mode Complete from the UE 50, and transmits an RRC Connection Reconfiguration to the UE 50, RRC Connection Reconfiguration Complete is received from UE50, and InitialInContext Setup Response is transmitted to MME30. Through such a procedure, the UE context and the UE context are established and held in the UE 50 and the eNB 10.
 図5に示すように、RRC接続状態において、eNB10はMME30に対してコネクション維持指示信号を送信する(ステップ101)。また、MME30はコネクション維持指示信号をS-GW40に送信する(ステップ102)。 As shown in FIG. 5, in the RRC connection state, the eNB 10 transmits a connection maintenance instruction signal to the MME 30 (step 101). Also, the MME 30 transmits a connection maintenance instruction signal to the S-GW 40 (step 102).
 コネクション維持指示信号は、当該UE50に関するS1-C/Uコネクションを維持しながら、UE50への着信時に下りデータをS-GW40に保留して、MME30からページングを行うことを指示する信号である。 The connection maintenance instruction signal is a signal that instructs the MME 30 to perform the paging by holding down the downlink data in the S-GW 40 when receiving the call to the UE 50 while maintaining the S1-C / U connection related to the UE 50.
 コネクション維持指示信号を受信したS-GW40は、指示を確認したことを示す確認応答をMME30に送信し(ステップ103)、MME30は、確認応答をeNB10に送信する(ステップ104)。 The S-GW 40 that has received the connection maintenance instruction signal transmits a confirmation response indicating that the instruction has been confirmed to the MME 30 (step 103), and the MME 30 transmits a confirmation response to the eNB 10 (step 104).
 UE50に関するeNB10からMME30へのコネクション維持指示信号の送信は、例えば、eNB10において、UE50をRRCアイドル状態に遷移させる事象が発生したことをトリガーとして行ってもよいし、UE50が最初にeNB10の配下でRRC接続状態になり、当該UE50に関するS1-C/Uコネクションが確立された直後に行うこととしてもよい。 The transmission of the connection maintenance instruction signal from the eNB 10 to the MME 30 regarding the UE 50 may be triggered by, for example, an event that causes the UE 50 to transition to the RRC idle state in the eNB 10, or the UE 50 is initially under the control of the eNB 10. It may be performed immediately after entering the RRC connection state and establishing the S1-C / U connection for the UE 50.
 上記のRRCアイドル状態に遷移させる事象とは、例えば、所定のタイマ(例:UE Inactivity Timer)の満了によって、UE50との通信(上り下りのユーザデータ通信)が一定時間発生しないことを検知した場合であるが、これに限られるわけではない。 The event that causes the transition to the RRC idle state is, for example, when it is detected that communication with the UE 50 (uplink / downlink user data communication) does not occur for a certain period of time due to expiration of a predetermined timer (eg, UE : Inactivity Timer). However, it is not limited to this.
 図5は、UE50との通信(上り下りのユーザデータ通信)が一定時間発生しないことを検知したことをトリガーとする場合を想定しており、ステップ101~104の後に、RRC接続解放(RRC Connection Release)をUE50に送信し、UE50をRRCアイドル状態に遷移させる(ステップ105)。 FIG. 5 assumes a case where it is triggered by detecting that communication with the UE 50 (uplink / downlink user data communication) does not occur for a certain period of time. After steps 101 to 104, RRC connection release (RRC Connection Release) is transmitted to the UE 50, and the UE 50 is shifted to the RRC idle state (step 105).
 本実施の形態では、UE50が、RRCアイドル状態に遷移する場合でも、UE50とeNB10のそれぞれにおいて、RRC接続時に確立したUEコンテクストは保持される。 In the present embodiment, even when the UE 50 transitions to the RRC idle state, the UE context established at the time of RRC connection is maintained in each of the UE 50 and the eNB 10.
 その後、UE50向けの下りデータが発生し、当該下りデータがS-GW40に到着する(ステップ106)。ここでは、S1-Uコネクションは確立済みであるが、ステップ102で受信したコネクション維持指示信号に基づき、S-GW40は、当該下りデータをeNB10に転送せずにバッファに保留しておく。 Thereafter, downlink data for the UE 50 is generated, and the downlink data arrives at the S-GW 40 (step 106). Here, the S1-U connection has been established, but based on the connection maintenance instruction signal received in step 102, the S-GW 40 holds the downlink data in the buffer without transferring it to the eNB 10.
 S-GW40は、下りデータ着信通知をMME30に送信し(ステップ107)、MME30はUE50向けのS1-APページングの信号をeNB10に送信する(ステップ108)。このページング自体は、既存のページングと同様であり、UE50のトラッキングエリアの各eNBに送信されるが、図5ではeNB10への送信を示している。 The S-GW 40 transmits a downlink data incoming notification to the MME 30 (step 107), and the MME 30 transmits an S1-AP paging signal for the UE 50 to the eNB 10 (step 108). This paging itself is the same as the existing paging, and is transmitted to each eNB in the tracking area of the UE 50, but FIG. 5 shows transmission to the eNB 10.
 S1-APページングの信号を受信したeNB10は、配下のUE50にRRCページングの信号を送信する(ステップ109)。 The eNB 10 that has received the S1-AP paging signal transmits the RRC paging signal to the subordinate UE 50 (step 109).
 RRCページング信号を受信したUE50は、RRC接続確立手順を実行し、RRC接続を確立させる(ステップ110)。その後、eNB10は、RRC接続の確立が完了したことを示す信号であるRRC接続確立完了をMME30に送信する(ステップ111)。なお、eNB10は、UE50とのRRC接続が確立したことを、例えば、eNB10がUE50からRRC Connection Setup Completeを受信したことで判別できる。 UE50 which received the RRC paging signal performs a RRC connection establishment procedure, and establishes a RRC connection (step 110). Thereafter, the eNB 10 transmits RRC connection establishment completion, which is a signal indicating that establishment of the RRC connection is completed, to the MME 30 (step 111). The eNB 10 can determine that the RRC connection with the UE 50 has been established, for example, when the eNB 10 receives RRC Connection Setup Complete from the UE 50.
 MME30はRRC接続確立完了の信号をS-GW40に送信する(ステップ112)。これにより、S-GW40はUE50とeNB10間のRRC接続が確立したと判断し、既に確立されているUE50に係るS1-Uコネクションを利用して、保留していた下りデータのeNB10への転送を開始する(ステップ113)。当該下りデータはeNB10からUE50に届く(ステップ114)。このようにしてUE50への下りデータの伝送が開始される。 The MME 30 transmits an RRC connection establishment completion signal to the S-GW 40 (step 112). Thereby, the S-GW 40 determines that the RRC connection between the UE 50 and the eNB 10 has been established, and uses the S1-U connection related to the UE 50 that has already been established to transfer the pending downlink data to the eNB 10. Start (step 113). The downlink data reaches the UE 50 from the eNB 10 (step 114). In this way, transmission of downlink data to the UE 50 is started.
 図5のステップ110のRRC接続確立手順の詳細については後述する。当該RRC接続確立手順では、UE50とeNB10のそれぞれでRRC接続時の確立し、保持しておいたUEコンテクストが利用されるので、従来は必要であった、RRC Security Mode Command、RRC Security Mode Complete、RRC Connection Reconfiguration、RRC Connection Reconfiguration Complete、等のメッセージの送受信を行うことなくRRC接続確立を行うことができる。 Details of the RRC connection establishment procedure in step 110 of FIG. 5 will be described later. In the RRC connection establishment procedure, the UE context established and held at the time of RRC connection in each of the UE 50 and the eNB 10 is used. Therefore, RRC Security Mode Command, RRC Security Mode Complete, RRC connection establishment can be performed without transmitting / receiving messages such as RRC RConnection Reconfiguration and RRC Connection Reconfiguration Complete.
 ここで、UE50とeNB10のそれぞれで保持されるUEコンテクストは、例えば、RRCコンフィギュレーション(RRC configuration)、ベアラコンフィギュレーション(bearer configuration: RoHC state information等を含む)、ASセキュリティコンテクスト(Access Stratum Security Context)、L2/L1パラメータ(MAC、PHYのコンフィギュレーション等)等である。 Here, the UE context held in each of the UE 50 and the eNB 10 includes, for example, an RRC configuration (RRC configuration), a bearer configuration (including bearer configuration: RoHC state information, etc.), an AS security context (Access Stratum Security Context). , L2 / L1 parameters (MAC, PHY configuration, etc.).
 また、UE50とeNB10とでUEコンテクストとして同じ情報を保持してもよいし、UE50は、eNB10との接続に必要なUEコンテクストの情報のみを保持し、eNB10は、UE50との接続に必要なUEコンテクストの情報のみを保持してもよい。 Further, the UE 50 and the eNB 10 may hold the same information as the UE context, the UE 50 holds only the UE context information necessary for the connection with the eNB 10, and the eNB 10 is the UE required for the connection with the UE 50. Only context information may be retained.
 より具体的には、RRCアイドル状態において、例えば、UE50とeNB10はそれぞれ、RRC Connection Setupで運ばれるRadioResourceConfigDedicatedの情報、RRC Connection Setup Completeで運ばれる能力情報、及びセキュリティ関連情報(キー情報等)、 RRC Security Mode Commandで運ばれるセキュリティ関連情報、RRC Connection Reconfigurationで運ばれるコンフィギュレーション情報等を、UEコンテクストとして保持する。なお、これらは一例であり、UEコンテクストとして保持する情報は、これらに限られず、追加で情報を保持してもよいし、これらの情報の一部を保持しないこととしてもよい。 More specifically, in the RRC idle state, for example, each of the UE 50 and the eNB 10 has RadioResourceConfigDedicated information carried by RRC Connection Setup, capability information carried by RRC Connection Setup Complete, and security-related information (key information etc.), RRC Security related information carried in Security Mode Command, configuration information carried in RRC Connection Reconfiguration, and the like are held as UE context. Note that these are merely examples, and information held as a UE context is not limited to these, and information may be additionally held, or part of the information may not be held.
 UE10とeNB10はそれぞれUEコンテクストとして上記のような情報を保持することで、RRCアイドル状態からRRC接続状態に遷移する際に、RRC Security Mode Command、RRC Security Mode Complete、RRC Connection Reconfiguration、RRC Connection Reconfiguration Complete、等のメッセージの送受信を行うことなくRRC接続確立を行うことができる。 UE10 and eNB10 each hold the above information as a UE context, so that when transitioning from the RRC idle state to the RRC connected state, RRCRRSecurity Mode Command, RRC Security Mode Complete, RRC Connection Reconfiguration, RRC Connection Reconfiguration Complete The RRC connection can be established without sending / receiving messages such as.
 また、本実施の形態では、eNB10は、UEコンテクストを、当該UEコンテクストに対応するUEの識別子(UE識別子)に対応付けて記憶手段に保持する。UE識別子の種類には限定はないが、本実施の形態では、一例として、UE識別子としてS-TMSI(SAE temporary mobile subscriber identity)を使用している。 Also, in the present embodiment, the eNB 10 holds the UE context in the storage unit in association with the identifier (UE identifier) of the UE corresponding to the UE context. Although there is no limitation on the type of the UE identifier, in this embodiment, as an example, S-TMSI (SAE temporary mobile subscriber identity) is used as the UE identifier.
 図6は、本実施の形態におけるシステム全体の処理シーケンスの他の例を示す図である。図6は、図5の場合と同じように、UE50がeNB10に接続してRRC接続状態となり、eNB10の配下のセルでRRCアイドル状態となり、同一セルで、その後に着信を受ける場合の処理シーケンスである。ただし、図6に示すシーケンスは、ステップ113、ステップ114のシーケンスが存在する点で、図5と異なる。以下、主に、図5と異なる点について説明する。 FIG. 6 is a diagram showing another example of the processing sequence of the entire system in the present embodiment. FIG. 6 is a processing sequence in the case where the UE 50 is connected to the eNB 10 to be in the RRC connected state, is in the RRC idle state in the cell under the eNB 10, and is subsequently received in the same cell, as in FIG. is there. However, the sequence shown in FIG. 6 is different from FIG. 5 in that there are steps 113 and 114. In the following, differences from FIG. 5 will be mainly described.
 ステップ110の手順により、UE50は、RRCアイドル状態からRRC接続状態になる。このとき、UE50とeNB10に保持されているUEコンテクストは、それぞれ、非アクティブ状態からアクティブ状態になる。つまり、ステップ110の手順により、UE50とeNB10に保持されているUEコンテクストは、それぞれ、アクティベートされる。 According to the procedure of Step 110, the UE 50 changes from the RRC idle state to the RRC connected state. At this time, the UE contexts held in the UE 50 and the eNB 10 change from the inactive state to the active state. That is, according to the procedure of step 110, the UE contexts held in the UE 50 and the eNB 10 are activated.
 ステップ111において、eNB10は、RRC接続の確立が完了したことを示す信号であるRRC接続確立完了をMME30に送信する。このRRC接続確立完了の信号は、UE50のUEコンテクストがアクティベートされたことを示す信号であってもよい。MME30はRRC接続確立完了の信号をS-GW40に送信する(ステップ112)。 In step 111, the eNB 10 transmits to the MME 30 RRC connection establishment completion, which is a signal indicating that establishment of the RRC connection is completed. This RRC connection establishment completion signal may be a signal indicating that the UE context of the UE 50 has been activated. The MME 30 transmits an RRC connection establishment completion signal to the S-GW 40 (step 112).
 そして、図6に示す例では、ステップ113において、S-GW40は、RRC接続確立完了の信号に対する応答の信号をMME30に送信する。また、ステップ114において、MME30は、ステップ111のRRC接続確立完了の信号に対する応答の信号をeNB10に送信する。ステップ114における応答の信号は、UEコンテクストがアクティベートされたことを示す信号に対するAckの信号であってもよい。 In the example shown in FIG. 6, in step 113, the S-GW 40 transmits a response signal to the RRC connection establishment completion signal to the MME 30. In Step 114, the MME 30 transmits a response signal to the signal indicating completion of RRC connection establishment in Step 111 to the eNB 10. The response signal in step 114 may be an Ack signal for a signal indicating that the UE context has been activated.
 その後、図5の場合と同様に、S-GW40は保留していた下りデータのeNB10への転送を開始する(ステップ115)。当該下りデータはeNB10からUE50に届く(ステップ116)。このようにしてUE50への下りデータの伝送が開始される。 After that, as in the case of FIG. 5, the S-GW 40 starts transferring the suspended downlink data to the eNB 10 (step 115). The downlink data reaches the UE 50 from the eNB 10 (step 116). In this way, transmission of downlink data to the UE 50 is started.
 (RRC接続確立手順の例)
 次に、本実施の形態におけるUE50とeNB10との間のRRC接続確立手順について、図7のシーケンスを参照して説明する。なお、図7に示すシーケンスは、図5及び図6のステップ110の手順を想定しているが、これに限られない。例えば、図7に示すシーケンスが、UE50からの発信時のRRC接続確立手順におけるものであってもよい。
(Example of RRC connection establishment procedure)
Next, the RRC connection establishment procedure between UE50 and eNB10 in this Embodiment is demonstrated with reference to the sequence of FIG. The sequence shown in FIG. 7 assumes the procedure of step 110 in FIGS. 5 and 6, but is not limited to this. For example, the sequence shown in FIG. 7 may be in the RRC connection establishment procedure at the time of transmission from the UE 50.
 図7に示すシーケンスの前に、UE50からeNB10にRandom Access Preambleが送信され、eNB10からUE50にRandom Access Responseが送信されているとする。 7, it is assumed that the Random Access Preamble is transmitted from the UE 50 to the eNB 10 and the Random Access Response is transmitted from the eNB 10 to the UE 50 before the sequence illustrated in FIG.
 UE50は、Random Access Responseに含まれるULグラントで割り当てられるリソースにより、ステップ201において、RRC Connection Requestメッセージ(RRC接続要求)をeNB10に送信する。本実施の形態では、ステップ201において、UE50は、RRC Connection Requestメッセージにおけるスペアビット(spare bit :1ビット)を使用して、UE50がUEコンテクストを保持していることをeNB10に通知する。例えば、ビットが立っている(1である)場合に、UE50はUEコンテクストを保持していることを示す。UE50がUEコンテクストを保持していることを示すこの情報をUEコンテクスト保持情報と呼ぶことにする。 The UE 50 transmits an RRC Connection Request message (RRC connection request) to the eNB 10 in Step 201 by using the resource allocated by the UL grant included in the Random Access Response. In the present embodiment, in step 201, the UE 50 notifies the eNB 10 that the UE 50 holds the UE context using a spare bit (spare bit: 1 bit) in the RRC Connection Request message. For example, when the bit is set (it is 1), it indicates that the UE 50 holds the UE context. This information indicating that the UE 50 holds the UE context will be referred to as UE context holding information.
 また、RRC Connection Requestメッセージには、上記のビットに加えて、UE50を識別するUE識別子(具体的には、S-TMSI(SAE temporary mobile subscriber identity ))が含まれる。S-TMSIは、UE50固有の識別子から生成される一時的なUE50の識別子であり、UE50の位置登録時等にMME30から払い出されるものである。本実施の形態では、UE50と各eNBは、UE50を識別するためのS-TMSIを保持しているものとする。 Also, the RRC Connection Request message includes a UE identifier for identifying the UE 50 (specifically, S-TMSI (SAE temporary mobile subscriber identity)) in addition to the above bits. The S-TMSI is a temporary identifier of the UE 50 generated from the unique identifier of the UE 50, and is issued from the MME 30 when the location of the UE 50 is registered. In this Embodiment, UE50 and each eNB shall hold | maintain S-TMSI for identifying UE50.
 ステップ201で上記RRC Connection Requestメッセージを受信したeNB10は、当該メッセージからUEコンテクスト保持情報とUE識別子を読み出すことで、UE識別子で識別されるUE50がUEコンテクストを保持していることを認識し、保持している複数のUEコンテクストの中から、当該UE識別子に対応するUEコンテクストを記憶手段から検索する。すなわち、UE識別子のマッチング処理を行う。 The eNB 10 that has received the RRC Connection Request message in step 201 recognizes that the UE 50 identified by the UE identifier holds the UE context by reading the UE context holding information and the UE identifier from the message, and holds it. The UE context corresponding to the UE identifier is retrieved from the storage means from the plurality of UE contexts that are being used. That is, UE identifier matching processing is performed.
 ステップ202において、eNB10は、検索の結果、UE識別子に対応するUEコンテクストを検出すると、RRC Connection Setupメッセージ(RRC接続確立メッセージ)により、eNB10がUE50のUEコンテクストを保持していることをUE50に通知するとともに、UE50の認証のための情報を送信するようにUE50に要求する。 In step 202, when the eNB 10 detects the UE context corresponding to the UE identifier as a result of the search, the eNB 10 notifies the UE 50 that the eNB 10 holds the UE context of the UE 50 by an RRC Connection Setup message (RRC connection establishment message). At the same time, the UE 50 is requested to transmit information for authenticating the UE 50.
 UE50のUEコンテクストを保持していることを示す情報が含まれるRRC Connection Setupメッセージを受信したUE50は、保持していたUEコンテクスト(ベアラ、security key、コンフィギュレーション等)を継続使用する。 The UE 50 that has received the RRC Connection Setup message including information indicating that the UE 50 holds the UE context continues to use the held UE context (bearer, security key, configuration, etc.).
 また、RRC Connection Setupメッセージに含まれるRadioResourceConfigDedicatedには、ベアラ、MAC及びPHYコンフィギュレーション等に関するパラメータ値が含まれるが、ステップ202において上記の通知・要求を含むRRC Connection Setupメッセージを受信したUE50は、RadioResourceConfigDedicatedにより通知されるパラメータ値を無視し、保持していたUEコンテクストのパラメータ値を継続使用する。なお、RadioResourceConfigDedicatedにより通知されるパラメータ値を無視せずに、通知されたパラメータ値を使用することとしてもよい。これにより、既に保持しているパラメータ値がeNB10により変更された場合に、その変更を反映することができる。 The RadioResourceConfigDedicated included in the RRC Connection Setup message includes parameter values related to the bearer, MAC, PHY configuration, and the like. Ignore the parameter value notified by, and continue to use the parameter value of the UE context that was held. The notified parameter value may be used without ignoring the parameter value notified by RadioResourceConfigDedicated. Thereby, when the parameter value already hold | maintained is changed by eNB10, the change can be reflected.
 次に、ステップ203において、UE50は、RRC Connection Setup Completeメッセージに、Authentication token、shortMAC-I等の認証情報を含めてeNB10に送信する。Authentication token、shortMAC-I等の認証情報は、eNB10がUE50を認証するために使用される情報である。 Next, in Step 203, the UE 50 transmits the RRC Connection Setup Complete message including the authentication information such as Authentication token, shortMAC-I, and the like to the eNB 10. Authentication information such as Authentication token and shortMAC-I is information used by the eNB 10 to authenticate the UE 50.
 RRC Connection Setup Completeメッセージを受信したeNB10は、当該メッセージに含まれる認証情報を使用して、UE50が、UE識別子により検索されたUEコンテクストに対応する正しいUEであることを認証する。その後、UE50とeNB10はそれぞれ、保持していたUEコンテクストを利用して接続を確立(再開)する。なお、保持していたUEコンテクストを利用して接続を確立(再開)するにあたって、ステップ203は必ずしも必須ではなく、ステップ203を実施しないこととしてもよい。 The eNB 10 that has received the RRC Connection Setup Complete message authenticates that the UE 50 is a correct UE corresponding to the UE context searched by the UE identifier, using the authentication information included in the message. After that, each of the UE 50 and the eNB 10 establishes (restarts) a connection using the held UE context. Note that when establishing (resuming) a connection using the retained UE context, step 203 is not necessarily required, and step 203 may not be performed.
 (RRC接続解放手順の例)
 本実施の形態においては、UE50がeNB10からRRC Connection Releaseメッセージを受信してRRCアイドル状態に遷移する際に、常にUEコンテクストを保持することとしてもよいし、RRC Connection Releaseメッセージ内にUEコンテクストを保持することを指示する情報が含まれていた場合にのみUEコンテクストを保持することとしてもよい。後者の例を以下に説明する。
(Example of RRC connection release procedure)
In the present embodiment, when the UE 50 receives the RRC Connection Release message from the eNB 10 and transits to the RRC idle state, the UE context may always be retained, or the UE context is retained in the RRC Connection Release message. It is good also as holding | maintaining UE context only when the information which instruct | indicates to be included is contained. The latter example will be described below.
 図8に示すように、eNB10がUE50をRRCアイドル状態に遷移させる場合に、eNB10はUE50に対してRRC Connection Releaseメッセージを送信する(ステップ301)。 As shown in FIG. 8, when the eNB 10 causes the UE 50 to transition to the RRC idle state, the eNB 10 transmits an RRCRRConnection メ ッ セ ー ジ Release message to the UE 50 (step 301).
 当該RRC Connection Releaseメッセージには、RRCアイドル状態においてUEコンテクストを保持し続けることをUE50に指示する指示情報(indication)が含まれる。なお、指示情報については、新規のindicationをメッセージ中に含めても良いし、既存のrelease causeのスペアビットを用いることとしてもよい。具体例については後述する。 The RRC Connection Release message includes indication information (indication) that instructs the UE 50 to continue to hold the UE context in the RRC idle state. For the instruction information, a new indication may be included in the message, or a spare bit of an existing release cause may be used. Specific examples will be described later.
 UE50は、RRC Connection Releaseメッセージから上記指示情報を検知した場合、RRCアイドル状態の間、RRCアイドル状態遷移時のUEコンテクスト(ベアラ情報,セキュリティ情報等)を保持し続ける。 When the UE 50 detects the instruction information from the RRC Connection Release message, the UE 50 continues to hold the UE context (bearer information, security information, etc.) at the RRC idle state transition during the RRC idle state.
 (システム全体の処理シーケンスの他の例)
 図5、図6に示した例では、UE10は、同じeNB10の下で、RRC接続状態とRRCアイドル状態との間の遷移を行ったが、ここでは別の例として、UE50がeNB10に接続してRRC接続状態となり、eNB10の配下のセルでRRCアイドル状態となり、その後に、UE50がeNB20の配下のセルに移動して、着信を受ける場合の処理シーケンスを図9を参照して説明する。
(Another example of the entire system processing sequence)
In the example illustrated in FIGS. 5 and 6, the UE 10 performs a transition between the RRC connection state and the RRC idle state under the same eNB 10, but here, as another example, the UE 50 connects to the eNB 10. The processing sequence when the UE enters the RRC connection state, enters the RRC idle state in the cell under the control of the eNB 10, and then moves to the cell under the control of the eNB 20 to receive the incoming call will be described with reference to FIG.
 図9の場合も、処理の前提として、UE50はeNB10のセルにおいてRRC接続状態にあり、S1-C/Uのコネクションが確立されている状態とする。 Also in the case of FIG. 9, as a premise of the processing, the UE 50 is in the RRC connection state in the cell of the eNB 10 and is in a state where the S1-C / U connection is established.
 図5、図6の場合と同様にして、eNB10はMME30に対してコネクション維持指示信号を送信する(ステップ401)。また、MME30はコネクション維持指示信号をS-GW40に送信する(ステップ402)。 5 and 6, the eNB 10 transmits a connection maintenance instruction signal to the MME 30 (Step 401). Also, the MME 30 transmits a connection maintenance instruction signal to the S-GW 40 (step 402).
 前述したとおり、コネクション維持指示信号は、当該UE50に関するS1-C/Uコネクションを維持しながら、UE50への着信時に下りデータをS-GW40に保留して、MME30からページングを行うことを指示する信号である。 As described above, the connection maintenance instruction signal is a signal instructing to hold down the downlink data in the S-GW 40 and perform paging from the MME 30 when the UE 50 arrives while maintaining the S1-C / U connection related to the UE 50. It is.
 コネクション維持指示信号を受信したS-GW40は、確認応答をMME30に送信し(ステップ403)、MME30は、確認応答をeNB10に送信する(ステップ404)。 The S-GW 40 that has received the connection maintenance instruction signal transmits a confirmation response to the MME 30 (step 403), and the MME 30 transmits a confirmation response to the eNB 10 (step 404).
 eNB10は、ステップ401~404の後に、RRC接続解放(RRC Connection Release)をUE50に送信し、UE50をRRCアイドル状態に遷移させる(ステップ405)。この後に、UE50はeNB20配下のセルに移動する。当該RRC Connection Releaseメッセージには、UEコンテクストを保持する指示が含まれており、UE50は、UEコンテクストを保持する。ただし、このUEコンテクストは、eNB10との接続に利用された情報である。 ENB10 transmits RRC connection release (RRC | Connection | Release) to UE50 after step 401-404, and makes UE50 change to an RRC idle state (step 405). After this, UE50 moves to the cell under eNB20. The RRC Connection Release message includes an instruction to hold the UE context, and the UE 50 holds the UE context. However, this UE context is information used for connection with the eNB 10.
 その後、UE50向けの下りデータが発生し、当該下りデータがS-GW40に到着する(ステップ406)。ここでは、S1-Uコネクションは確立済みであるが、ステップ402で受信したコネクション維持指示信号に基づき、S-GW40は、当該下りデータをeNB10に転送せずにバッファに保留しておく。 Thereafter, downlink data for the UE 50 is generated, and the downlink data arrives at the S-GW 40 (step 406). Here, the S1-U connection has been established, but based on the connection maintenance instruction signal received in step 402, the S-GW 40 holds the downlink data in the buffer without transferring it to the eNB 10.
 S-GW40は、下りデータ着信通知をMME30に送信し(ステップ407)、MME30はUE50向けのS1-APページングの信号をeNB20に送信する(ステップ408)。このページング自体は、既存のページングと同様であり、UE50のトラッキングエリアの各eNB(1つ又は複数のeNBのそれぞれ)に送信されるが、図9ではeNB20への送信を示している。 The S-GW 40 transmits a downlink data incoming notification to the MME 30 (step 407), and the MME 30 transmits an S1-AP paging signal for the UE 50 to the eNB 20 (step 408). This paging itself is the same as the existing paging and is transmitted to each eNB (each of one or a plurality of eNBs) in the tracking area of the UE 50, but FIG. 9 shows transmission to the eNB 20.
 S1-APページングの信号を受信したeNB20は、配下のUE50にRRCページングの信号を送信する(ステップ409)。 The eNB 20 that has received the S1-AP paging signal transmits the RRC paging signal to the subordinate UE 50 (step 409).
 RRCページングを受信したUE50は、RRC接続確立手順を実行し、RRC接続を確立させる(ステップ410)。また、eNB20とコアNW側(図9ではS-GW40)との間でNAS接続手順が実行され、eNB20についてのS1-C/Uコネクションが確立される(ステップ411)。 UE50 which received RRC paging performs a RRC connection establishment procedure, and establishes a RRC connection (step 410). Further, a NAS connection procedure is executed between the eNB 20 and the core NW side (S-GW 40 in FIG. 9), and an S1-C / U connection for the eNB 20 is established (step 411).
 上記により、UE50とS-GW40とのコネクションが確立されるため、S-GW40は、UE50への下りデータの送信を開始する(ステップ412、S413)。また、eNB10とMME30間でのUEコンテクストが解放されるとともに、eNB10についてのS1-C/Uコネクションが解放される(ステップ414)。 As described above, since the connection between the UE 50 and the S-GW 40 is established, the S-GW 40 starts transmission of downlink data to the UE 50 (steps 412 and S413). Further, the UE context between the eNB 10 and the MME 30 is released, and the S1-C / U connection for the eNB 10 is released (step 414).
 上記の例では、ステップ410のRRC接続確立手順において、UE50は、図7のステップ201のメッセージを送信するが、eNB20は、UE50に対応するUEコンテクストを保持していないと判断するため、通常のRRC接続手順が実施される。もしくは、eNB20は、自身がUE50に対応するUEコンテクストを保持していないと判断した場合に、RRC接続確立手順におけるメッセージによりUE50から通知されるPCI(UE50がUEコンテクストを保持したセルのeNB10を識別するセルID)等に基づいて、eNB10からUE50のUEコンテクストを取得し、当該UEコンテクストを利用して、RRC接続を行うこととしてもよい。 In the above example, in the RRC connection establishment procedure in step 410, the UE 50 transmits the message in step 201 in FIG. 7, but the eNB 20 determines that the UE context corresponding to the UE 50 is not held. An RRC connection procedure is performed. Alternatively, when the eNB 20 determines that the UE context does not hold the UE context corresponding to the UE 50, the PCI notified from the UE 50 by the message in the RRC connection establishment procedure (identifies the eNB 10 of the cell in which the UE 50 holds the UE context). The UE context of the UE 50 may be acquired from the eNB 10 based on the cell ID) and the like, and the RRC connection may be performed using the UE context.
 (仕様変更例)
 次に、図7、図8で説明した各種の通知を行う場合における3GPP仕様書(3GPP TS 36.331、非特許文献3)の記載例(抜粋)を図10~図14に示す。図10~図14において、非特許文献3からの変更箇所に下線が引かれている。非特許文献3からの変更箇所に下線が引かれている点は、他の仕様変更例の図においても同様である。
(Specification change example)
Next, description examples (extracts) of the 3GPP specifications (3GPP TS 36.331, Non-Patent Document 3) when various notifications described with reference to FIGS. 7 and 8 are performed are shown in FIGS. 10 to 14, the changed part from Non-Patent Document 3 is underlined. The point where the changed part from the non-patent document 3 is underlined is the same in the drawings of other specification change examples.
 図10Aは、図7のステップ201でUE50から送信されるRRC Connection Requestメッセージの例を示す。図10Aに示すように、ue-ContextStoring(例:1ビット)が追加されている。図10Bに示すように、ue-ContextStoringは、UE50が、前回のRRC接続において使用したUEコンテクストを保持していることを示す情報である。また、図10Aに示すとおり、S-TMSIが含まれている。 FIG. 10A shows an example of an RRC Connection Request message transmitted from the UE 50 in Step 201 of FIG. As shown in FIG. 10A, ue-ContextStoring (example: 1 bit) is added. As illustrated in FIG. 10B, ue-ContextStoring is information indicating that the UE 50 holds the UE context used in the previous RRC connection. Also, as shown in FIG. 10A, S-TMSI is included.
 図11Aは、図7のステップ202でeNB10から送信されるRRC Connection Setupメッセージの例を示す。図11Aに示すように、ue-ContextStoredとue-AuthenticationInfoReqが追加されている。 FIG. 11A shows an example of an RRC Connection Setup message transmitted from the eNB 10 in step 202 of FIG. As shown in FIG. 11A, ue-ContextStored and ue-AuthenticationInfoReq are added.
 図11Bに示すように、ue-AuthenticationInfoReqは、UEに対して認証情報を送信するよう要求する情報である。ue-ContextStoredは、eNBが、RRC Connection Setupの対象とするUEのUEコンテクストを保持することを示す情報である。UEは、この情報(フィールド)が存在することを検出した場合、当該RRC Connection Setupメッセージにより通知されるradioRecourceConfigDedicatedフィールドを無視する。なお、前述したとおり、radioRecourceConfigDedicatedフィールドを無視せずに、これにより通知されたパラメータ値を適用することとしてもよい。 As shown in FIG. 11B, ue-AuthenticationInfoReq is information requesting the UE to transmit authentication information. ue-ContextStored is information indicating that the eNB holds the UE context of the UE that is the target of RRC Connection Setup. When the UE detects the presence of this information (field), the UE ignores the radioRecourceConfigDedicated field notified by the RRC Connection Setup message. As described above, the parameter value notified by this may be applied without ignoring the radioRecourceConfigDedicated field.
 図12は、図7のステップ203においてUE50から送信されるRRC Connection Setup Completeメッセージの例を示す。図12に示すとおり、認証情報であるue-AuthenticationToken及びue-AuthenticationInfoが追加されている。 FIG. 12 shows an example of an RRC Connection Setup message transmitted from the UE 50 in Step 203 of FIG. As shown in FIG. 12, authentication information ue-AuthenticationToken and ue-AuthenticationInfo are added.
 図13~図14は、図8のステップ301においてeNB10から送信されるRRC Connection Releaseメッセージの例1、2を示す。 13 to 14 show examples 1 and 2 of RRC Connection Release message transmitted from the eNB 10 in step 301 of FIG.
 図13A及びBは、Cause valueを使用してUEコンテクスト保持指示を行う例(例1)を示す。この場合、図13Aに示すように、ReleaseCause内にUEcontextHoldingが追加される。図13Bに示すとおり、ue-ContextHoldingの値は、UEがRRCアイドル状態の間、UEコンテクストを保持し続ける指示を示す。 FIGS. 13A and 13B show an example (Example 1) of instructing UE context retention using Cause value. In this case, as shown in FIG. 13A, UEcontextHolding is added in ReleaseCause. As shown in FIG. 13B, the value of ue-ContextHolding indicates an instruction to keep the UE context while the UE is in the RRC idle state.
 図14A及びBは、新規indicationを使用してUEコンテクスト保持指示を行う例(例2)を示す。図14Aに示すように、新規indicationとしてue-ContextHoldingが追加されている。図14Bに示すとおり、ue-ContextHoldingは、UEがRRCアイドル状態の間、UEコンテクストを保持し続ける指示を示す。 FIGS. 14A and 14B show an example (Example 2) in which a UE context retention instruction is performed using a new indication. As shown in FIG. 14A, ue-ContextHolding is added as a new indication. As shown in FIG. 14B, ue-ContextHolding indicates an instruction that the UE continues to hold the UE context while in the RRC idle state.
  (変形例1:RRC接続確立手順、RRC接続解放手順の他の例)
 本実施の形態におけるUE50とeNB10との間のRRC接続確立手順について、図7のシーケンスを参照して信号の内容を含めて説明したが、以下では、RRC接続確立手順の他の例について、変形例1として説明する。また、RRC接続解放手順についても、信号の内容についての他の例を説明する。なお、変形例1の前に、図7のシーケンスを参照して説明した例を、便宜上、基本例と呼ぶ。
(Variation 1: Other example of RRC connection establishment procedure and RRC connection release procedure)
Although the RRC connection establishment procedure between the UE 50 and the eNB 10 in the present embodiment has been described with reference to the sequence of FIG. 7 and includes the contents of the signal, hereinafter, other examples of the RRC connection establishment procedure are modified. This will be described as Example 1. In addition, another example of signal contents will be described for the RRC connection release procedure. Note that the example described with reference to the sequence of FIG. 7 before the first modification is referred to as a basic example for convenience.
  <変形例1のRRC接続確立手順>
 変形例1のRRC接続確立手順におけるシーケンス自体は、図7に示したシーケンスと同じであるので、図7を参照して変形例1のRRC接続確立手順について説明する。変形例1においても、図7に示すシーケンスは、図5及び図6のステップ110の手順を想定しているが、これに限られない。例えば、図7に示すシーケンスが、UE50からの発信時のRRC接続確立手順におけるものであってもよい。
<Procedure for RRC connection establishment of Modification 1>
Since the sequence itself in the RRC connection establishment procedure of Modification 1 is the same as the sequence shown in FIG. 7, the RRC connection establishment procedure of Modification 1 will be described with reference to FIG. Also in the first modification, the sequence illustrated in FIG. 7 assumes the procedure of step 110 in FIGS. 5 and 6, but is not limited thereto. For example, the sequence shown in FIG. 7 may be in the RRC connection establishment procedure at the time of transmission from the UE 50.
 図7に示すシーケンスの前に、UE50からeNB10にRandom Access Preambleが送信され、eNB10からUE50にRandom Access Responseが送信されているとする。 7, it is assumed that the Random Access Preamble is transmitted from the UE 50 to the eNB 10 and the Random Access Response is transmitted from the eNB 10 to the UE 50 before the sequence illustrated in FIG.
 UE50は、Random Access Responseに含まれるULグラントで割り当てられるリソースにより、ステップ201において、RRC Connection Requestメッセージ(RRC接続要求)をeNB10に送信する。変形例1では、ステップ201において、UE50は、UEコンテクストを保持している場合に、認証情報をRRC Connection Requestメッセージに含めて送信する。当該認証情報は、eNB10がUE50を認証するために使用される情報であり、例えば、前回のRRC接続で使用したC-RNTI、PCI、及びShortMAC-Iを含む。 The UE 50 transmits an RRC Connection Request message (RRC connection request) to the eNB 10 in Step 201 by using the resource allocated by the UL grant included in the Random Access Response. In the first modification, in Step 201, when the UE 50 holds the UE context, the UE 50 transmits the authentication information included in the RRC Connection Request message. The authentication information is information used by the eNB 10 to authenticate the UE 50, and includes, for example, C-RNTI, PCI, and ShortMAC-I used in the previous RRC connection.
 また、この認証情報は、UE50がUEコンテクストを保持していることをeNB10に通知するためのUEコンテクスト保持情報の例でもある。 Also, this authentication information is an example of UE context holding information for notifying the eNB 10 that the UE 50 holds the UE context.
 ステップ201で上記RRC Connection Requestメッセージを受信したeNB10は、認証情報を用いてUE50の認証を行い、認証に成功し、かつ、UE50のUEコンテクストを保持していることを検知した場合に、UE50に対し、UE50が保持しているUEコンテクストをアクティベート(アクティブ化)することを指示する情報を含むRRC Connection Setupメッセージ(RRC接続確立メッセージ)をUE50に送信する(ステップ202)。上記の検知は、例えば、eNB10が、保持している複数のUEコンテクストの中から、UE固有の識別子(例:S-TMSI、C-RNTI、shortMAC-I)に対応するUEコンテクストを記憶手段から検索することにより行うことができる。なお、UEコンテクストをアクティベート(アクティブ化)することを指示する情報は、eNB10がUE50のUEコンテクストを保持していることを示すコンテクスト保持情報の例である。 The eNB 10 that has received the RRC Connection Request message in step 201 authenticates the UE 50 using the authentication information, and detects that the authentication has succeeded and the UE context of the UE 50 is retained. On the other hand, an RRC Connection Setup message (RRC connection establishment message) including information instructing to activate (activate) the UE context held by the UE 50 is transmitted to the UE 50 (step 202). The above detection is performed by, for example, storing the UE context corresponding to the UE-specific identifier (eg, S-TMSI, C-RNTI, shortMAC-I) from the storage unit among the plurality of UE contexts held by the eNB 10. This can be done by searching. Note that the information for instructing activation (activation) of the UE context is an example of context holding information indicating that the eNB 10 holds the UE context of the UE 50.
 上記の認証に失敗した場合、eNB10は、RRC接続を拒否するRRC Connection RejectメッセージをUE50に送信する。認証が成功してもeNB10がUE50のUEコンテクストを保持していることを検知できなかった場合には、eNB10は、UE50が保持しているUEコンテクストをアクティベート(アクティブ化)することを指示する情報を含まないRRC Connection Setupメッセージ(RRC接続確立メッセージ)をUE50に送信する。 When the above authentication fails, the eNB 10 transmits to the UE 50 an RRCjectConnection す る Reject message that rejects the RRC connection. If the eNB 10 cannot detect that the eNB 10 holds the UE context of the UE 50 even if the authentication is successful, the eNB 10 instructs to activate (activate) the UE context held by the UE 50. RRC Connection Setup message (RRC connection establishment message) not including
 UEコンテクストをアクティベートすることを指示する情報が含まれるRRC Connection Setupメッセージを受信したUE50は、保持していたUEコンテクスト(ベアラ、security key、コンフィギュレーション等)をアクティベートする。アクティベートするとは、保持していたUEコンテクストを有効化することであり、例えば、各種無線リソースの設定、測定設定、認証キーの更新処理等を含む。なお、アクティベートする処理は特定の処理に限られるわけではない。 The UE 50 that has received the RRC Connection Setup message including information instructing activation of the UE context activates the retained UE context (bearer, security key, configuration, etc.). Activating means activating the retained UE context, and includes, for example, various radio resource settings, measurement settings, authentication key update processing, and the like. Note that the activation process is not limited to a specific process.
 また、RRC Connection Setupメッセージに含まれるRadioResourceConfigDedicatedには、ベアラ、MAC及びPHYコンフィギュレーション等に関するパラメータ値が含まれ得るが、ステップ202において上記のアクティベート指示を含むRRC Connection Setupメッセージを受信したUE50は、RadioResourceConfigDedicatedにより通知されるパラメータ値を適用する。適用は、例えば、非特許文献3における「5.3.10 Radio resource configuration」に従ってなされる。つまり、RadioResourceConfigDedicatedに含まれる情報に基づく設定を行う。 The RadioResourceConfigDedicated included in the RRC Connection Setup message may include parameter values related to the bearer, MAC, PHY configuration, and the like. However, the UE 50 that has received the RRC Connection Setup message including the activation instruction in Step 202 receives the RadioResourceConfigDedicated. The parameter value notified by is applied. The application is made in accordance with “5.3.105.3Radio resource configuration” in Non-Patent Document 3, for example. That is, setting is performed based on information included in RadioResourceConfigDedicated.
 一例として、UE50が、UEコンテクストの一部として、前回のRRC接続時のRadioResourceConfigDedicatedにおける「A」という情報を保持していて、ステップ202においてRadioResourceConfigDedicatedにより「B」という情報を受信した場合、UE50は、「A」という情報に加えて、「B」という情報を使用できる。 As an example, when the UE 50 holds the information “A” in RadioResourceConfigDedicated at the time of the previous RRC connection as part of the UE context, and receives the information “B” by RadioResourceConfigDedicated in Step 202, the UE 50 In addition to the information “A”, the information “B” can be used.
 また、UE50が、UEコンテクストの一部として、前回のRRC接続時のRadioResourceConfigDedicatedにおける「A」という情報を保持していて、ステップ202においてRadioResourceConfigDedicatedにより、「A」と同じ種類であるが値の異なる「A´」を受信した場合、保持していた「A」は、ステップ202で受信した「A´」により更新(変更)される。 Further, the UE 50 holds information “A” in RadioResourceConfigDedicated at the time of the previous RRC connection as a part of the UE context, and is the same type as “A” but has a different value by “RadioResourceConfigDedicated” in Step 202. When “A ′” is received, the held “A” is updated (changed) by “A ′” received in step 202.
 つまり、上記の処理により、保存していたRadioResourceConfigDedicatedの情報と、ステップ202において受信したRadioResourceConfigDedicatedの情報とのパラメータ差分の設定を行うことができる。これをdelta configurationと呼ぶ。 That is, according to the above processing, the parameter difference between the stored RadioResourceConfigDedicated information and the RadioResourceConfigDedicated information received in Step 202 can be set. This is called delta configuration.
 次に、ステップ203において、UE50は、RRC Connection Setup CompleteメッセージをeNB10に送信する。 Next, in step 203, the UE 50 transmits an RRC Connection Setup Complete message to the eNB 10.
 <変形例1の仕様変更例>
 次に、変形例1における3GPP仕様書(3GPP TS 36.331、非特許文献3)の記載例(抜粋)を図15~図25に示す。図15~図25において、非特許文献3からの変更箇所に下線が引かれている。
<Specification change example of modification 1>
Next, description examples (extracts) of 3GPP specifications (3GPP TS 36.331, Non-Patent Document 3) in Modification 1 are shown in FIGS. In FIG. 15 to FIG. 25, the changes from Non-Patent Document 3 are underlined.
 図15は、図7のステップ201でUE50からRRC Connection Requestメッセージを送信する際のUE50の動作を規定する仕様の変更例を示す。 FIG. 15 shows an example of a change in the specification that defines the operation of the UE 50 when the RRC Connection Request message is transmitted from the UE 50 in Step 201 of FIG.
 図15における「1> if the UE supports the RRCConnectionRequest-r13-IEs and criticalExtRRC-ConnEstReqAllowed is included in SystemInformationBlockType2:」、「2>set the RRCConnectionRequest-r13-IEs in the RRCConnectionRequest message;」は、「RRCConnectionRequest-r13-IEs」(変形例1における認証情報を運ぶメッセージ)を、UE50とeNB10の両方がサポートしている場合に、当該メッセージをUE50が送信することを示す。eNB10が「RRCConnectionRequest-r13-IEs」に対応していることを示すcriticalExtRRC-ConnEstReqAllowedは、SIB2によりeNB10からUE50に報知される。 “1> if the UE supports the RRCConnectionRequest-r13-IEs and criticalExtRRC-ConnEstReqAllowed is included in SystemInformationBlockType2:”, “2> set the RRCConnectionRequest-r13-IEs in the RRCConnectionRequest message;” It shows that UE50 transmits the said message, when both UE50 and eNB10 support "IEs" (message which carries the authentication information in the modification 1). criticalExtRRC-ConnEstReqAllowed indicating that the eNB 10 is compatible with “RRCConnectionRequest-r13-IEs” is reported from the eNB 10 to the UE 50 by SIB2.
 「1 >if the UE stores the valid AS configuration into VarAS-Config:」、「2>set the ue-Identity to UE-AS-ConfigIdentity;」は、UE50が、正当なUEコンテクスト(AS configuration)を保持している場合に、ue-Identity(後述するue-Identity-r13)に認証情報(UE-AS-ConfigIdentity)を含めることを示す。これにより、認証情報がRRC Connection RequestメッセージによりeNB10に送信される。VarAS-Configは、UEコンテクスト(AS configuration)を格納する変数である。 “1> if the UE stores the valid AS configuration into VarAS-Config:”, “2> set the ue-Identity to UE-AS-ConfigIdentity;” indicates that the UE 50 holds a valid UE context (AS configuration). In this case, the authentication information (UE-AS-ConfigIdentity) is included in ue-Identity (ue-Identity-r13 described later). Thereby, the authentication information is transmitted to the eNB 10 by the RRCRRConnection Request message. VarAS-Config is a variable for storing the UE context (AS configuration).
 図16Aは、図7のステップ201でUE50から送信されるRRC Connection Requestメッセージの例を示す。図16Aに示すように、認証情報である「UE-AS-ConfigIdenity」が追加されている。図16Bに示すように、「UE-AS-ConfigIdenity」は、UE50とE-UTRAN(つまり、eNB10)に保持されているAS configuration(UEコンテクスト)を識別し、認証する情報を含む。当該情報は、例えば、前回のRRC接続時のC-RNTI、PCI、及びShortMAC-Iを含む。 FIG. 16A shows an example of an RRC Connection Request message transmitted from the UE 50 in step 201 of FIG. As shown in FIG. 16A, authentication information “UE-AS-ConfigIdenity” is added. As illustrated in FIG. 16B, “UE-AS-ConfigIdenity” includes information for identifying and authenticating the AS configuration (UE context) held in the UE 50 and the E-UTRAN (that is, the eNB 10). The information includes, for example, C-RNTI, PCI, and ShortMAC-I at the previous RRC connection.
 図17は、図7のステップ202でeNB10から送信されるRRC Connection SetupメッセージをUE50が受信した際の動作を規定する仕様の変更例を示す。 FIG. 17 shows an example of a change in the specification that defines the operation when the UE 50 receives the RRC Connection Setup message transmitted from the eNB 10 in step 202 of FIG.
 図17において、「1>if the valid AS configuration is stored into VarAS-Config:」、「2 >if the ue-AS-ConfigActivate is set to true and nextHopChainingCount is included in the RRCConnectionSetup message:」として記載されているように、当該仕様に従って動作するUE50は、RRC Connection Setupメッセージを受信すると、まず、UEコンテクスト(valid AS configuration)を保持しているかどうかを確認し、保持していたら、RRC Connection Setupメッセージにおいて「UEコンテクストのアクティベート(有効化)が指示されており(ue-AS-ConfigActivate is set to true)、かつ、nextHopChainingCountが含まれている」か否かを判定する。nextHopChainingCountは、認証キーを更新する際に用いられる値である。 In FIG. 17, “1> if> the val AS configuration is stored into VarAS-Config:”, “2> if the ue-AS-ConfigActivate is set to true and nextHopChainingCount is included in the RRCConnectionSetup message:” As described above, when receiving the RRC 当 該 Connection Setup message, the UE 50 that operates according to the specification first confirms whether or not the UE context (valid AS configuration) is held. It is determined whether or not activation of the context is instructed (ue-AS-ConfigActivate is set to true) and nextHopChainingCount is included. nextHopChainingCount is a value used when updating the authentication key.
 「UEコンテクストのアクティベートが指示されており(ue-AS-ConfigActivate is set to true)、かつ、nextHopChainingCountが含まれている」と判定された場合、eNB10での認証が成功したと判断し、保持していたUEコンテクストのアクティベート(有効化)を実施する。 If it is determined that “UE context activation is instructed (ue-AS-ConfigActivate is set to true) and nextHopChainingCount is included,” it is determined that authentication at the eNB 10 is successful, and is retained. Activate the activated UE context.
 具体的には、まず、「3>perform the radio resource configuration procedure in accordance with the radioResourceConfigDedicated stored into VarAS-Config and as specified in 5.3.10;」として記載されているように、VarAS-Configに保持しているradioResourceConfigDedicated(無線リソース設定情報)に従って、無線リソース設定を実行する。 Specifically, as described in `` 3> perform the radio resource configuration procedure in accordance with the radioResourceConfigDedicated stored into VarAS-Config and as specified in 5.3.10; '' The radio resource setting is executed according to the radioResourceConfigDedicated (radio resource setting information).
 次に、「3 >perform the measurement configuration procedure in accordance with the measConfig stored into VarAS-Config as specified in 5.5.2」として記載されているように、保持していたmeasConfig(測定設定情報)に従って、測定設定(measurement configuration)を行う。また、「3>update the KeNB key based on the KASME key to which the current KeNB is associated, using the nextHopChainingCount value included in the RRCConnectionSetup message, as specified in TS 33.401 [32];」から、「3>configure lower layers to apply ciphering using the previously configured algorithm, the KRRCenc key and the KUPenc key immediately, i.e., ciphering shall be applied to all subsequent messages received and sent by the UE, including the message used to indicate the successful completion of the procedure ;」までの手順により、security keyの更新が実行される。 Next, as described in “3> perform 情報 the 保持 measurement configuration procedure in accordance with the measConfig stored into VarAS-Config as specified in 5.5.2 '' (Measurement configuration) is performed. Also, from “3> update the KeNB key based on the KASME key to which the current KeNB is associated, using the nextHopChainingCount value included in the RRCConnectionSetup message, as specified in TS 33.401 [32]; to apply ciphering using the previously configured algorithm, the KRRCenc key and the KUPenc key immediately, ie, ciphering shall be applied to all subsequent messages receive and sent Security key is updated according to the procedure.
 一方、UE50がUEコンテクストを保持している場合でも、「UEコンテクストのアクティベートが指示されており(ue-AS-ConfigActivate is set to true)、かつ、nextHopChainingCountが含まれている」かどうかの判定がNoとなる場合(例:ue-AS-ConfigActivateを受信しない場合)には、eNB10がUEコンテクストを保持していないと判断できる。そして、「2>else: 3>release all the AS configuration stored into VarAS-Config;」として記載されているように、UE50は、保持していたUEコンテクストを解放する。"解放する"とは、例えば、保持していたUEコンテクストを削除することである。 On the other hand, even when the UE 50 holds the UE context, it is determined whether the activation of the UE context is instructed (ue-AS-ConfigActivate is set to true and nextHopChainingCount is included). When it becomes No (for example, when not receiving ue-AS-ConfigActivate), it can be determined that the eNB 10 does not hold the UE context. Then, as described in “2> else: 記載 3> release all the AS configuration stored into VarAS-Config;", the UE 50 releases the held UE context. “Release” means, for example, deleting the held UE context.
 「UEコンテクストのアクティベートが指示されており(ue-AS-ConfigActivate is set to true)、かつ、nextHopChainingCountが含まれている」かどうかの判定がYesとなる場合、Noとなる場合のいずれの場合も、「1>perform the radio resource configuration procedure in accordance with the received radioResourceConfigDedicated and as specified in 5.3.10 ;」として記載されているように、RRCConnectionSetupメッセージで受信したradioResourceConfigDedicatedを適用する。これにより、前述したdelta configurationを行うことが可能となる。 In both cases where the determination of “UE context activation is instructed (ue-AS-ConfigActivate is set to true) and nextHopChainingCount is included” is Yes or No The radioResourceConfigDedicated received in the RRCConnectionSetup message is applied as described in “1> perform the radio resource configuration procedure in accordance with the received radioResourceConfigDedicated and as specified in 5.3.10;". Thereby, it becomes possible to perform the delta-configuration described above.
 図18Aは、図7のステップ202でeNB10から送信されるRRC Connection Setupメッセージの例を示す。図18Aに示すように、ue-AS-ConfigActivateとnextHopChainingCountが追加されている。図18Bに示すように、ue-AS-ConfigActivateは、UE50が、保持していたUEコンテクストの利用を再開することを示す。 FIG. 18A shows an example of an RRC Connection Setup message transmitted from the eNB 10 in step 202 of FIG. As shown in FIG. 18A, ue-AS-ConfigActivate and nextHopChainingCount are added. As illustrated in FIG. 18B, ue-AS-ConfigActivate indicates that the UE 50 resumes the use of the UE context that has been held.
 前述したとおり、eNB10は、認証NGの場合に、RRC connection RejectメッセージをUE50に送信する。また、認証NGであるか否かにかかわらず、eNB10は、例えば輻輳によりRRC Connectionを拒否し、RRC connection RejectメッセージをUE50に送信する場合もある。 As described above, the eNB 10 transmits an RRC connection Reject message to the UE 50 in the case of authentication NG. Regardless of whether or not the authentication is NG, the eNB 10 may reject the RRC Connection due to congestion, for example, and may send an RRC connection Reject message to the UE 50.
 変形例1において、RRC connection Rejectメッセージを受信したUE50は、例えば、以下のOption 1又はOption 2の動作を実行する。 In Modification 1, the UE 50 that has received the RRC connection Reject message executes, for example, the following Option 1 or Option 2 operation.
 Option 1:UE50は、RRC connection RejectでAS configuration(UEコンテクスト)を解放するように指示されたら解放する。逆にそうでなければ(解放指示がない場合)、AS configurationは保持したままとする。 Option-1: UE50 releases it when it is instructed to release AS configuration (UE context) in RRC connectionReject. On the other hand, if not (if there is no release instruction), AS configuration is retained.
 Option 2:UE50は、RRC connection RejectでAS configurationを保持(storing)するように指示されたら保持したままとする。逆にそうでなければ(保持の指示がない場合)、AS configurationを解放する。 Option-2: UE50 keeps holding it when it is instructed to hold (storing) AS-configuration in RRC connection-Reject. Conversely, if not (if there is no instruction to hold), the AS configuration is released.
 Option 1に対応するRRC connection Reject受信時のUE動作の仕様変更例を図19に示し、Option 2に対応するRRC connection Reject受信時のUE動作の仕様変更例を図20に示す。 FIG. 19 shows an example of a UE operation specification change when receiving an RRC connection Reject corresponding to Option 1 and FIG. 20 shows an example of a UE operation specification change when receiving an RRC connection Reject corresponding to Option 2.
 図19に「1>if ue-AS-ConfigRelease is included and the UE stores the AS configuration into VarAS-Config specified in 7.1: 2>release the AS configuration stored into VarAS-Config;」と記載されているように、UE50は、解放指示(ue-AS-ConfigRelease)を受信したら、UEコンテクストを解放する。「1>else if ue-AS-ConfigRelease is not included and the UE stores the AS configuration into VarAS-Config: 2>keep storing the AS configuration into VarAS-Config;」と記載されているように、解放指示がない場合、UE50は、UEコンテクストを保持し続ける。 As shown in FIG. 19, “1> if> ue-AS-ConfigRelease is included and the UE stores the AS configuration into VarAS-Config specified in 7.1: 2> release the AS configuration stored into VarAS-Config; Upon receiving the release instruction (ue-AS-ConfigRelease), the UE 50 releases the UE context. There is no release instruction as described in “1> else if ue-AS-ConfigRelease is not included and the UE stores the AS configuration into VarAS-Config: 2> keep storing the AS configuration into VarAS-Config; If so, the UE 50 continues to hold the UE context.
 また、解放指示がない場合において、「2>if ue-AS-ConfigValidityTime is included: 3>overwrite the AS configuration validity time with the received value in ue-AS-ConfigValidityTime;」と記載されているように、UEコンテクストの有効時間(validity time)をue-AS-ConfigValidityTimeの値で上書きする。これにより、UEコンテクストの保存時間(後述)を変更することができる。 Also, when there is no release instruction, as described in `` 2> if2ue-AS-ConfigValidityTime is included: 3> overwrite the AS configuration validity time with the received value in ue-AS-ConfigValidityTime; '' Overwrite the context validity time (validity time) with the value of ue-AS-ConfigValidityTime. Thereby, the preservation | save time (after-mentioned) of UE context can be changed.
 図20に「1>if ue-AS-ConfigStoring is included and the UE stores the AS configuration into VarAS-Config specified in 7.1: 2> keep the AS configuration stored into VarAS-Config;」と記載されているように、option 2では、UE50は、保持指示(ue-AS-ConfigStoring)を受信したら、UEコンテクストを保持し続ける。また、保持指示がある場合において、「2>if ue-AS-ConfigValidityTime is included: 3>overwrite the AS configuration validity time with the received value in ue-AS-ConfigValidityTime;」と記載されているように、UEコンテクストの有効時間(validity time)をue-AS-ConfigValidityTimeの値で上書きする。 As shown in FIG. 20, “1> if ue-AS-ConfigStoring is included and the UE stores the AS configuration into VarAS-Config specified in 7.1: 2> keep the AS configuration stored into VarAS-Config; In option IV2, the UE 50 continues to hold the UE context when receiving the holding instruction (ue-AS-ConfigStoring). Also, in the case where there is a holding instruction, the UE is described as `` 2> if ue-AS-ConfigValidityTime is included: 3> overwrite the AS configuration validity time with the received value in ue-AS-ConfigValidityTime; '' Overwrite the context validity time (validity time) with the value of ue-AS-ConfigValidityTime.
 また、「1> else if ue-AS-ConfigStoring is not included and the UE stores the AS configuration into VarAS-Config: 2>release the AS configuration into VarAS-Config;」と記載されているように、保持指示がない場合、UE50は、UEコンテクストを解放する。 In addition, as described in `` 1> else if ue-AS-ConfigStoring is not included and the UE stores the AS configuration into VarAS-Config: 2> release the AS configuration into VarAS-Config; If not, the UE 50 releases the UE context.
 図21A及びBに、Option 1に対応するRRC connection Rejectメッセージの仕様変更例を示し、図22A及びBに、Option 2に対応するRRC connection Rejectメッセージの仕様変更例を示す。図21A、図21B、図22A及び図22Bに示すとおり、ue-AS-ConfigValidityTimeは、RRCアイドル状態中におけるUEコンテクストの更新された最大保持時間を示す。 FIGS. 21A and 21B show an example of changing the specification of the RRC connection Reject message corresponding to Option 1, and Figs. 22A and 22B show an example of the specification change of the RRC connection Reject message corresponding to Option 2. As shown in FIGS. 21A, 21B, 22A, and 22B, ue-AS-ConfigValidityTime indicates the updated maximum retention time of the UE context during the RRC idle state.
 <変形例1におけるRRC接続解放手順について>
 変形例1におけるRRC接続解放手順は、図8を参照して説明した手順と同様である。メッセージの内容については、図13、図14に示したものを使用してもよいし、以下に説明するように他の例を使用してもよい。
<Regarding RRC Connection Release Procedure in Modification 1>
The RRC connection release procedure in the first modification is the same as the procedure described with reference to FIG. The message contents shown in FIGS. 13 and 14 may be used, or other examples may be used as described below.
 図23Aは、図8のステップ301においてeNB10から送信されるRRC Connection Releaseメッセージの例3を示す。図23Aに示すように、ue-AS-ConfigDeactiveが含まれる。ue-AS-ConfigDeactiveは、前述したUEコンテクスト保持指示に相当する。また、UEコンテクストを保持する期間(時間)を示すue-AS-ConfigValidityTimeが追加されている。図23Bに示すように、ue-AS-ConfigDeactiveは、UE50が、RRCアイドル状態にある間、UEコンテクストを保持することを示す。ue-AS-ConfigValidityTimeは、UE50が、RRCアイドル状態にある間、UEコンテクストを保持する最大時間(保持期限)を示す。 FIG. 23A shows an example 3 of the RRC Connection Release message transmitted from the eNB 10 in step 301 of FIG. As shown in FIG. 23A, ue-AS-ConfigDeactive is included. ue-AS-ConfigDeactive corresponds to the UE context holding instruction described above. Further, ue-AS-ConfigValidityTime indicating a period (time) for holding the UE context is added. As shown in FIG. 23B, ue-AS-ConfigDeactive indicates that the UE 50 holds the UE context while in the RRC idle state. ue-AS-ConfigValidityTime indicates the maximum time (holding time limit) for holding the UE context while the UE 50 is in the RRC idle state.
 図24は、図23A及びBに示すRRC Connection Releaseメッセージを使用する場合に、RRC Connection Releaseメッセージを受信するUE50の動作を規定する仕様の変更例を示す。図24の下線部に示したように、当該仕様に従って動作するUE50は、RRC Connection Releaseメッセージにue-AS-ConfigDeactiveが含まれている(ue-AS-ConfigDeactive is set to true)ことを確認すると、UEコンテクストとして、現在のradioResourceConfigDedicated(無線リソース設定情報)、securityAlgorithmConfig(セキュリティアルゴリズム設定情報)、及びmeasConfig(測定設定情報)をVarAS-Configに格納する。また、UE50は、PCellのphysCellIdをVarAS-Configに格納し、現在のue-IdentityをVarAS-Configに格納する。 FIG. 24 shows an example of a change in the specification that defines the operation of the UE 50 that receives the RRC Connection Release message when the RRC Connection Connection Release message shown in FIGS. As shown in the underlined portion of FIG. 24, the UE 50 operating according to the specification confirms that ue-AS-ConfigDeactive is included in the RRC Connection Release message (ue-AS-ConfigDeactive is set to true) As the UE context, the current radioResourceConfigDedicated (radio resource setting information), securityAlgorithmConfig (security algorithm setting information), and measConfig (measurement setting information) are stored in VarAS-Config. Moreover, UE50 stores PCell's physCellId in VarAS-Config, and stores the current ue-Identity in VarAS-Config.
  <UEコンテクストの保持期間について>
 UEコンテクスト保持指示を含むRRC Connection Releaseメッセージを受信して、RRCアイドル状態に移行したUE50(及びeNB10)は、基本的に、RRCアイドル状態の間、UEコンテクストを保持し続ける。ただし、RRCアイドル状態にある期間が非常に長い場合等において、UE50及びeNB10がUEコンテクストを保持し続けることは、UE50及びeNB10のそれぞれにおいて負荷となる。
<About UE context retention period>
The UE 50 (and the eNB 10) that has received the RRC Connection Release message including the UE context holding instruction and has shifted to the RRC idle state basically keeps holding the UE context during the RRC idle state. However, when the period in the RRC idle state is very long, for example, the UE 50 and the eNB 10 continue to hold the UE context becomes a load on each of the UE 50 and the eNB 10.
 そこで、変形例1では、UE50がUEコンテクストの保持する有限の時間(UEコンテクスト保持期限)を設けることとしている。既に説明したように、ue-AS-ConfigValidityTimeが当該時間を示す。 Therefore, in the first modification, the UE 50 provides a finite time (UE context retention time limit) that the UE context retains. As already described, ue-AS-ConfigValidityTime indicates the time.
 例えば、当該時間をTとすると、UE50は、UEコンテクスト保持指示を含むRRC Connection Releaseメッセージを受信し、RRCアイドル状態に遷移して、UEコンテクストを保持したまま、RRCアイドル状態が継続する場合でも、UEコンテクストの保持を開始した時刻(=UEコンテクスト保持指示を含むRRC Connection Releaseメッセージを受信した時刻)から、Tが経過した時点で、UEコンテクストは無効になったと判断し、当該UEコンテクストを解放(削除)する。同じ時間Tは、eNB10にも設定され、eNB10は、UE50と同様にして、UEコンテクストの保持を開始した時刻(=UEコンテクスト保持指示を含むRRC Connection Releaseメッセージを送信した時刻)から、Tが経過した時点で、UEコンテクストは無効になったと判断し、当該UEコンテクストを解放(削除)する。 For example, when the time is T, the UE 50 receives the RRC Connection Release message including the UE context holding instruction, transitions to the RRC idle state, and maintains the UE context, while the RRC idle state continues. It is determined that the UE context has become invalid when T has elapsed from the time when the UE context is held (= the time when the RRC Connection Release message including the UE context holding instruction is received), and the UE context is released ( delete. The same time T is also set in the eNB 10, and the eNB 10, like the UE 50, has passed T from the time when the UE context is held (= the time when the RRC Connection Release message including the UE context holding instruction is transmitted). At this point, it is determined that the UE context has become invalid, and the UE context is released (deleted).
 上記のようなUEコンテクスト保持期限を設ける場合の仕様書(非特許文献3)の変更例を図25に示す。図25は、仕様書の「7.1 UE variables」に、UEコンテクストを保持する変数であるVarAS-Configが追加されたことを示す。図25に示すように、VarAS-Configは、RRCアイドル状態の間にUE50に格納されるUEコンテクスト(AS configuration)を含む。また、UE50は、RRC接続状態を離れてから、所定の期間(上記のT)が経過した場合に、UEコンテクストが無効になったと判断する。 FIG. 25 shows a modification example of the specification (Non-Patent Document 3) in the case where the UE context retention period as described above is provided. FIG. 25 shows that VarAS-Config, which is a variable that holds the UE context, is added to “7.1 UE variables” of the specification. As illustrated in FIG. 25, VarAS-Config includes a UE context (AS configuration) stored in UE 50 during the RRC idle state. In addition, the UE 50 determines that the UE context has become invalid when a predetermined period (the above T) has elapsed after leaving the RRC connection state.
 また、図25に示すように、VarAS-Configは、UEコンテクスト(AS configuration)として、RadioResourceConfigDedicated, SecurityAlgorithmConfig, MeasConfig, NextHopChainingCount, PhysCellId, S-TMSI, C-RNTIを含む。ただし、これらは例であり、これらのうちの一部を保持しないこととしてもよい。また、これら以外の情報を保持してもよい。 Also, as shown in FIG. 25, VarAS-Config includes RadioResourceConfigDedicated, SecurityAlgorithmConfig, MeasConfig, NextHopChainingCount, PhysCellId, S-TMSI, and C-RNTI as the UE context (AS configuration). However, these are examples, and some of them may not be retained. Information other than these may be held.
 UEコンテクストを保持する所定の期間(上記のT)は、仕様により固定的に定めることとしてもよいし、図25の例のように、ue-AS-ConfigValidityTimeを用いてeNB10からUE50に設定することとしてもよい。 The predetermined period for holding the UE context (the above T) may be fixed according to the specification, or set from the eNB 10 to the UE 50 using ue-AS-ConfigValidityTime as in the example of FIG. It is good.
 上記のようにしてUEコンテクスト保持期限を設けることは、基本例においても適用可能である。
(変形例2:Context Fetch)
 図9の例において前述したように、UE50が、UEコンテクストを持たないeNB20のセルに移動した場合でも、eNB20は、UE50から通知される情報に基づいて、eNB10を特定し、eNB10からUE50のUEコンテクストを取得し、当該UEコンテクストを利用して、RRC接続を行うことが可能である。このように、あるeNBが他のeNBからUEコンテクストを取得することをContext Fetchと呼ぶ。
Providing the UE context retention period as described above is also applicable to the basic example.
(Modification 2: Context Fetch)
As described above in the example of FIG. 9, even when the UE 50 moves to the cell of the eNB 20 that does not have the UE context, the eNB 20 identifies the eNB 10 based on the information notified from the UE 50, and the UE 50 of the UE 50 from the eNB 10 It is possible to obtain a context and make an RRC connection using the UE context. Thus, it is called Context Fetch that a certain eNB acquires a UE context from another eNB.
 以下では、UE50がeNB10の配下でRRC接続状態からRRCアイドル状態になり、その後、UE50が、eNB10とは異なるeNB20の配下のセルの移動する場合(例:図9に示したケース)について、eNB20がUEコンテクストを取得するための処理について説明する。なお、eNB10とeNB20はそれぞれ、コンテクスト保持機能を有するとともに、以下で説明するように、コンテクスト取得手順を実行する機能を有している。 In the following, when the UE 50 changes from the RRC connected state to the RRC idle state under the control of the eNB 10 and then the UE 50 moves in a cell under the control of the eNB 20 different from the eNB 10 (example: case shown in FIG. 9), the eNB 20 The process for acquiring the UE context will be described. Note that each of the eNB 10 and the eNB 20 has a context holding function and a function of executing a context acquisition procedure as described below.
 まず、図26を参照して、UE50とeNB20間の処理を説明する。図26に示す処理の前提として、UE50は、RRCアイドル状態にあり、eNB10との間の接続時におけるUEコンテクストを保持している。そして、UE50は、RRCアイドル状態のままでeNB20配下のセルに移動し、発信を実施することを契機として、もしくは着信を受けたことを契機としてRRC接続状態への遷移手順が起動された状況を想定する。 First, the process between the UE 50 and the eNB 20 will be described with reference to FIG. As a premise of the process illustrated in FIG. 26, the UE 50 is in an RRC idle state and holds a UE context at the time of connection with the eNB 10. Then, the UE 50 moves to the cell under the eNB 20 in the RRC idle state, and when the call is made or when the incoming procedure is received, the transition procedure to the RRC connected state is activated. Suppose.
 ステップ451にてRandom Access PreambleがUE50からeNB20に送信され、ステップ452にて、Random Access ResponseがeNB20からUE50に返される。 In Step 451, Random Access Preamble is transmitted from the UE 50 to the eNB 20, and in Step 452, Random Access Response is returned from the eNB 20 to the UE 50.
 ステップ453において、UE50は、RRC Connection RequestメッセージをeNB20に送信する。ステップ453で送信するメッセージには、UE50が保持するUEコンテクストに対応するeNB側のUEコンテクストを保持するeNB(ここではeNB10)を特定する情報と、当該UEコンテクストがUE50のものであることを特定するための情報(UE50のUEコンテクストを特定する情報)とを含む。また、RRC Connection Requestメッセージは、UE50のUEコンテクストを認証するための認証情報を含む。認証情報は、例えば、前回のRRC接続時のC-RNTI、PCI、及びShortMAC-Iである。 In step 453, the UE 50 transmits an RRC Connection Request message to the eNB 20. In the message transmitted in step 453, information specifying the eNB (in this case, eNB 10) holding the eNB-side UE context corresponding to the UE context held by the UE 50, and specifying that the UE context belongs to the UE 50 Information (information for specifying the UE context of the UE 50). Further, the RRC Connection Request message includes authentication information for authenticating the UE context of the UE 50. The authentication information is, for example, C-RNTI, PCI, and ShortMAC-I at the previous RRC connection.
 本例では、eNBを特定する情報とUEコンテクストを特定する情報とを有するID(ここではresume IDと呼ぶことにする)がRRC Connection Requestメッセージに含まれている。 In this example, an ID (herein referred to as “resume ID”) having information identifying the eNB and information identifying the UE context is included in the RRC Connection Request message.
 RRC Connection Requestメッセージで送信されるresume IDのビット長は例えば24ビットである。そして、例えば、resume IDの上位数ビット、下位数ビットでそれぞれeNB及びUEコンテクストをする。一例としては、RRC Connection Requestメッセージで送信されるresume IDにおける上位8ビットをeNBの特定用の情報とし、下位16ビットをUEコンテクストの特定用の情報とすることが考えられる。なお、これらの数値は一例に過ぎない。 For example, the bit length of the resume ID transmitted in the RRC Connection Request message is 24 bits. Then, for example, the eNB and the UE context are made with the upper few bits and the lower few bits of the resume ID. As an example, the upper 8 bits in the resume ID transmitted in the RRC Connection で Request message may be information for specifying the eNB, and the lower 16 bits may be information for specifying the UE context. These numerical values are only examples.
 ただし、一般には、多くのeNBが多くのUEコンテクストを保持することが想定されるため、24ビットのresume IDでは、特定のUEのUEコンテクストを保持するeNBを特定できない場合が生じ得る。すなわち、例えば、eNB20は、RRC Connection Requestメッセージのresume IDにおけるeNB特定用情報に対応する複数のeNB(Context Fetchを行う宛先候補のeNB)の情報(アドレス等)を有している場合には、どのeNBへContext Fetchを行ってよいかを判別できない。 However, in general, since it is assumed that many eNBs hold many UE contexts, a case where the eNB holding the UE context of a specific UE cannot be specified with a 24-bit resume ID may occur. That is, for example, when the eNB 20 has information (addresses, etc.) of a plurality of eNBs (destination candidate eNBs that perform Context Fetch) corresponding to the information for eNB identification in the resume ID of the RRC Connection Connection Request message, It cannot be determined to which eNB Context Fetch may be performed.
 そこで、本例では、そのような場合に、上記のresume ID(これをshort resume IDと呼ぶ)よりもビット長の長いresume ID(これをlong resume IDと呼ぶ)をeNBからUEに要求することとしている。以下のステップは、このような要求を行う場合の例である。short resume IDは、UEがUEコンテクストを保持していることを示すコンテクスト保持情報の例である。 Therefore, in this example, in such a case, the eNB requests the UE from the eNB for a resume ID (this is called a long resume ID) that is longer than the resumeresID (this is called a short resume ID). It is said. The following steps are examples for making such a request. The short resume ID is an example of context holding information indicating that the UE holds the UE context.
 ステップ454において、eNB20は、UE50にlong resume ID を要求する情報を含むRRC Connection SetupメッセージをUE50に送信する。また、RRC Connection Setupメッセージには、UEコンテクストをアクティベートするための情報が含まれる。ステップ455において、UE50は、long resume ID を含むRRC Connection Setup CompleteメッセージをeNB20に送信する。 In step 454, the eNB 20 transmits an RRC Connection Setup message including information requesting the UE 50 for a long resume ID to the UE 50. The RRCRRConnection Setup message includes information for activating the UE context. In step 455, the UE 50 transmits an RRC Connection Setup Complete message including long resume ID to the eNB 20.
 long resume IDのビット長は例えば40ビットである。そして、例えば、long resume IDにおける上位24ビットをeNBの特定用の情報とし、下位16ビットをUEコンテクストの特定用の情報とすることが考えられる。なお、これらの数値は一例に過ぎない。 The bit length of long resume ID is 40 bits, for example. Then, for example, it is conceivable that the upper 24 bits in the long resume ID are information for specifying the eNB and the lower 16 bits are information for specifying the UE context. These numerical values are only examples.
 また、short resume IDとlong resume IDを組み合わせて使用してもよい。例えば、short resume IDの先頭(上位)16ビットでUEコンテクストを特定し、「short resume IDの残り8ビット+long resume IDの40ビット=48ビット」でeNBを特定することとしてもよい。また、resume IDを全体で所定ビット長(例:40ビット)とし、最初の所定ビット(例:24ビット)をRRC Connection Requestメッセージに含め、残りの所定ビット(例:16ビット)をRRC Connection Setup Completeメッセージに含めるようにしてもよい。 Also, a combination of short resume ID and long resume ID may be used. For example, the UE context may be specified by the first (upper) 16 bits of short resume ID, and the eNB may be specified by “remaining 8 bits of short resume ID + 40 bits of long resume ID = 48 bits”. Also, the resume ID is set to a predetermined bit length (eg, 40 bits), the first predetermined bit (eg, 24 bits) is included in the RRCRRConnection Request message, and the remaining predetermined bits (eg, 16 bits) are included in the RRC Connection Setup. It may be included in the Complete message.
 また、例えば、RRC Connection Requestメッセージに含めるshort resume IDを40ビットとして、short resume IDに、eNBの特定用の情報とUEコンテクストの特定用の情報に加えて、当該UEコンテクストに対応するUEの認証のための情報(shortMAC-Iに相当する情報)を含めてもよい。同様に、例えば、56ビットのlong resume IDに、eNBの特定用の情報とUEコンテクストの特定用の情報に加えて、当該UEコンテクストに対応するUEの認証のための情報(shortMAC-Iに相当する情報)を含めてもよい。 Also, for example, the short resume ID included in the RRC Connection Request message is 40 bits, and the short resume ID is added to the eNB identification information and the UE context identification information, and the authentication of the UE corresponding to the UE context. (Information corresponding to shortMAC-I) may be included. Similarly, for example, in addition to the information for identifying the eNB and the information for identifying the UE context, information for authenticating the UE corresponding to the UE context (corresponding to shortMAC-I) Information).
 なお、short Resume IDでeNBとUEコンテクストを特定できる場合には、ステップ454のRRC Connection Setupの送信、ステップ455のRRC Connection Setup Completeの送信は行われるが、long Resume IDの要求及びlong Resume IDの送信は含まない。また、short Resume IDが自分(eNB20)を示す場合、つまり、eNB20がUEコンテクストを保持する場合には、他のeNBに対するContext Fetchを行わない。ただし、short Resume IDでeNBとUEコンテクストを特定できる場合でも、long Resume IDの要求及びlong Resume IDの送信を含むこととしてもよい。 If the eNB and UE context can be identified by the short Resume ID, the RRC Connection Setup is transmitted in Step 454 and the RRC Connection Setup Complete is transmitted in Step 455, but the long Resume ID request and the long Resume ID are requested. Does not include transmission. Further, when the short Resume ID indicates itself (eNB 20), that is, when the eNB 20 holds the UE context, Context Fetch for other eNBs is not performed. However, even when the eNB and the UE context can be identified by the short Resume ID, the request for the long Resume ID and transmission of the long Resume ID may be included.
 ステップ460において、eNB20は、UE50から受信したresume ID(short resume IDのみ、 long resume IDのみ、又はlong resume IDとshort resume IDの組み合わせ)により、UEコンテクストを保持するeNBとしてeNB10を特定し、eNB10との間でコンテクスト取得手順を実行する。 In step 460, the eNB 20 identifies the eNB 10 as the eNB that holds the UE context based on the resume ID received from the UE 50 (only the short resume ID, only the long resume ID, or the combination of the long resume ID and the short resume ID). Context acquisition procedure is executed with
 次に、コンテクスト取得手順例について図27を参照して説明する。ステップ455において、UE50は、RRC Connection Setup CompleteメッセージをeNB20に送信する。 Next, an example of a context acquisition procedure will be described with reference to FIG. In step 455, the UE 50 transmits an RRC Connection Setup Complete message to the eNB 20.
 ステップ461において、eNB20は、resume IDにより識別されるeNB10に対してコンテクスト要求メッセージを送信する。コンテクスト要求メッセージには、resume IDと認証情報が含まれる。なお、後述するように、resume ID自身に認証情報を含む場合には、resume IDとは別の認証情報を含めないこととしてもよい。 In step 461, the eNB 20 transmits a context request message to the eNB 10 identified by the resume ID. The context request message includes a resume ID and authentication information. As will be described later, when resume 認証 ID itself includes authentication information, authentication information other than resume ID may not be included.
 ステップ461で、コンテクスト要求メッセージを受信したeNB10は、UE50のUEコンテクストを特定する情報(例:short resume IDの下位16ビット、long resume IDの下位16ビット等)に基づいて、eNB10において記憶手段に保持されている複数のUEコンテクストの中から、UE50のUEコンテクストを特定・取得するとともに、認証情報により認証を行う。ここでは認証に成功したとする。 In step 461, the eNB 10 that has received the context request message stores information in the eNB 10 based on information identifying the UE context of the UE 50 (eg, lower 16 bits of short resume ID, lower 16 bits of long resume ID, etc.). The UE context of the UE 50 is identified and acquired from a plurality of held UE contexts, and authentication is performed using authentication information. Here, it is assumed that the authentication is successful.
 そして、ステップ462で、eNB10は、取得したUEコンテクストを含むコンテクスト応答メッセージをeNB20に送信する。 In step 462, the eNB 10 transmits a context response message including the acquired UE context to the eNB 20.
 UE50のUEコンテクストを取得したeNB20は、ステップ471において、例えば、RRC Connection ReconfigurationメッセージをUE50に送信する。また、ステップ472において、UE50は、RRC Connection Reconfiguration CompleteメッセージをeNB20に送信する。これにより、UE50とeNB20は、UEコンテクストを再利用して、UE50とeNB20との間の接続を確立し、状態をRRC接続状態に遷移させる。 ENB20 which acquired UE context of UE50 transmits the RRC | Connection * Reconfiguration message to UE50 in step 471, for example. In step 472, the UE 50 transmits an RRC Connection Reconfiguration Complete message to the eNB 20. Thereby, UE50 and eNB20 reuse UE context, establish the connection between UE50 and eNB20, and make a state change to a RRC connection state.
 なお、UE50とeNB20は、保持/取得したUEコンテクストを再利用することでUE50とeNB20との間のRRC接続を確立できるので、ステップ471とステップ47を実行しないこととしてもよい。もしくは、UE50は、RRC Connection Reconfigurationメッセージで受信するコンフィギュレーション情報のうちの一部又は全部を無視してもよい。また、無視せずに、RRC Connection Reconfigurationメッセージで受信するコンフィギュレーション情報を適用してもよい。 Note that the UE 50 and the eNB 20 can establish the RRC connection between the UE 50 and the eNB 20 by reusing the retained / acquired UE context, and therefore the steps 471 and 47 may not be executed. Alternatively, the UE 50 may ignore a part or all of the configuration information received by the RRC Connection Reconfiguration message. Moreover, you may apply the configuration information received with a RRC | Connection | Reconfiguration message, without ignoring.
 また、eNB20が、コンテクスト取得手順を実行したが、目的のUEコンテクストを取得できなかった場合(ステップ473)、例えば、RRC Connection Releaseメッセージを送信し、UE50をRRCアイドル状態とする(ステップ474)。 Also, when the eNB 20 has executed the context acquisition procedure but failed to acquire the target UE context (step 473), for example, an RRC Connection Release message is transmitted, and the UE 50 is set in the RRC idle state (step 474).
  <変形例2の仕様変更例>
 次に、変形例2における3GPP仕様書(3GPP TS 36.331、非特許文献3)の記載例(抜粋)を図28~図30に示す。図28~図30において、非特許文献3からの変更箇所に下線が引かれている。
<Specification change example of modification 2>
Next, description examples (extracts) of the 3GPP specifications (3GPP TS 36.331, Non-Patent Document 3) in Modification 2 are shown in FIGS. In FIG. 28 to FIG. 30, the changed part from Non-Patent Document 3 is underlined.
 図28Aは、図26のステップ453でUE50から送信されるRRC Connection Requestメッセージの例を示す。 FIG. 28A shows an example of an RRC Connection Request message transmitted from the UE 50 in Step 453 of FIG.
 図28Aに示すように、認証情報であるUE-AS-ConfigIdenityに加えて、上述したshort resume IDに相当するshortResumeIdentityが追加されている。図28Bに示すように、本例でのshortResumeIdentityは、UEコンテクスト(AS configuration)と、 当該UEコンテクストを格納するeNBを識別するための24ビット長の識別子である。 As shown in FIG. 28A, in addition to UE-AS-ConfigIdenity that is authentication information, a shortResumeIdentity corresponding to the short-resume ID described above is added. As shown in FIG. 28B, shortResumeIdentity in this example is a 24-bit identifier for identifying the UE context (AS configuration) and the eNB that stores the UE context.
 図29Aは、図26のステップ454でeNB20から送信されるRRC Connection Setupメッセージの例を示す。図29Aに示すように、前述したue-AS-ConfigActivateとnextHopChainingCountに加えて、requestLongResumeIdentityが示されている。requestLongResumeIdentityは、前述したlong resume IDの要求に相当する。図29Bに示すように、requestLongResumeIdentityは、UEに対して、longResumeIdentity(long resume ID)を提供することを要求することを示す。 FIG. 29A shows an example of the RRC Connection Setup message transmitted from the eNB 20 in step 454 of FIG. As shown in FIG. 29A, requestLongResumeIdentity is shown in addition to the ue-AS-ConfigActivate and nextHopChainingCount described above. requestLongResumeIdentity corresponds to the request for long resume ID described above. As illustrated in FIG. 29B, requestLongResumeIdentity indicates that the UE is requested to provide longResumeIdentity (long resume ID).
 図30Aは、図26のステップ455でUE50から送信されるRRC Connection Setup Completeメッセージの例を示す。 FIG. 30A shows an example of the RRC Connection Setup message transmitted from the UE 50 in Step 455 of FIG.
 図30Aに示すように、上述したlong resume IDに相当するlongResumeIdentityが追加されている。図30Bに示すように、本例でのlongResumeIdentityは、UEコンテクスト(AS configuration)と、 当該UEコンテクストを格納するeNBを識別するための40ビット長の識別子である。 As shown in FIG. 30A, a longResumeIdentity corresponding to the long-resume ID described above is added. As illustrated in FIG. 30B, longResumeIdentity in this example is a 40-bit identifier for identifying a UE context (AS configuration) and an eNB that stores the UE context.
 RRC Connection RequestメッセージとRRC Connection Setup Completeメッセージについては、図31A及びB、図32A及びBに示す内容としてもよい。この場合も、RRC Connection Setupメッセージについては、図29A及びBに示したものと同じである。 The RRC Connection Request message and the RRC Connection Setup Complete message may have the contents shown in FIGS. 31A and 31B and FIGS. 32A and 32B. Again, the RRCRRConnection Setup message is the same as that shown in FIGS. 29A and 29B.
 図31Aは、図26のステップ453でUE50から送信されるRRC Connection Requestメッセージの例を示す。 FIG. 31A shows an example of an RRC Connection Request message transmitted from the UE 50 in step 453 of FIG.
 図31Aに示すように、認証情報であるUE-AS-ConfigIdenityに加えて、short resume IDに相当するshortResumeIdentityが追加されている。図31Bに示すように、本例でのshortResumeIdentityは、UEコンテクスト(AS configuration)と当該UEコンテクストを格納するeNBを識別し、更に、当該UEコンテクストに対応するUEを認証するための40ビットの識別子である。なお、本実施の形態において"UEコンテクストに対応するUEを認証する"とは、"当該UEが保存されたUEコンテクストの所在者であることを認証する"ことでもある。また、本例では、UE-AS-ConfigIdenityの中にshortMAC-Iを含めないこととしてもよい。 As shown in FIG. 31A, shortResumeIdentity corresponding to short resume ID is added in addition to UE-AS-ConfigIdenity which is authentication information. As shown in FIG. 31B, the shortResumeIdentity in this example identifies the UE context (AS configuration) and the eNB that stores the UE context, and further identifies a 40-bit identifier for authenticating the UE corresponding to the UE context. It is. In the present embodiment, “authenticating the UE corresponding to the UE context” also means “authenticating that the UE is a person in the stored UE context”. In this example, shortMAC-I may not be included in UE-AS-ConfigIdenity.
 図32Aは、図26のステップ455でUE50から送信されるRRC Connection Setup Completeメッセージの例を示す。 FIG. 32A shows an example of the RRC Connection Setup message transmitted from the UE 50 in Step 455 of FIG.
 図32Aに示すように、long resume IDに相当するlongResumeIdentityが追加されている。図32Bに示すように、本例でのlongResumeIdentityは、UEコンテクスト(AS configuration)と当該UEコンテクストを格納するeNBを識別し、更に、当該UEコンテクストに対応するUEを認証するための56ビットの識別子である。 As shown in FIG. 32A, a longResumeIdentity corresponding to a longresume ID is added. As shown in FIG. 32B, the longResumeIdentity in this example identifies the UE context (AS configuration) and the eNB that stores the UE context, and also a 56-bit identifier for authenticating the UE corresponding to the UE context. It is.
 また、RRC Connection RequestメッセージとRRC Connection Setup Completeメッセージについては、図33A及びB、図34A及びBに示す内容としてもよい。この場合も、RRC Connection Setupメッセージについては、図29A及びBに示したものと同じである。図33A及びB、図34A及びBに示す例では、resume IDを全体で40ビットとし、最初の24ビットをRRC Connection Requestメッセージに含め、残りの16ビットをRRC Connection Setup Completeメッセージに含める。なお、この場合でも、便宜上、RRC Connection Requestメッセージに含める最初の24ビットを「short resume ID」と呼び、RRC Connection Setup Completeメッセージに含める残りの16ビットと最初の24ビットを合わせた識別子を「long resume ID」と呼ぶこととしてもよい。 Also, the RRC Connection Request message and RRC Connection Setup Complete message may have the contents shown in FIGS. 33A and B and FIGS. 34A and B. Again, the RRCRRConnection Setup message is the same as that shown in FIGS. 29A and 29B. In the examples shown in FIGS. 33A and B and FIGS. 34A and B, the resume ID is 40 bits as a whole, the first 24 bits are included in the RRC Connection Request message, and the remaining 16 bits are included in the RRC Connection Setup message. Even in this case, for the sake of convenience, the first 24 bits included in the RRC Connection Connection Request message are referred to as a “short Resume ID”, and an identifier including the remaining 16 bits included in the RRC Connection Connection Setup message and the first 24 bits is “long”. It may be called “resume ID”.
 図33Aは、図26のステップ453でUE50から送信されるRRC Connection Requestメッセージの例を示す。 FIG. 33A shows an example of an RRC Connection Request message transmitted from the UE 50 in Step 453 of FIG.
 図33Aに示すように、認証情報であるUE-AS-ConfigIdenityに加えて、上述したshort resume IDに相当するresumeIdentity-LSBが追加されている。図33Bに示すように、resumeIdentity-LSBは、UEコンテクスト(AS configuration)と、 当該UEコンテクストを格納するeNBを識別するためのresume identityにおける最下位(least significant)24ビットである。 As shown in FIG. 33A, in addition to UE-AS-ConfigIdenity which is authentication information, resumeIdentity-LSB corresponding to the above short-resume ID is added. As illustrated in FIG. 33B, the resumeIdentity-LSB is the least significant 24 bits in the UE context (AS configuration) and the resume identity for identifying the eNB storing the UE context.
 図34Aは、図26のステップ455でUE50から送信されるRRC Connection Setup Completeメッセージの例を示す。 FIG. 34A shows an example of the RRC Connection Complete message transmitted from the UE 50 in step 455 of FIG.
 図34Aに示すように、resumeIdentity-MSBが追加されている。図34Bに示すように、resumeIdentity-MSBは、UEコンテクスト(AS configuration)と、 当該UEコンテクストを格納するeNBを識別するためのresume identityにおける最上位(most significant)16ビットである。 As shown in FIG. 34A, resumeIdentity-MSB is added. As shown in FIG. 34B, the resumeIdentity-MSB is the most significant (most significant) 16 bits in the UE context (AS configuration) and the resume identity for identifying the eNB storing the UE context.
 また、RRC Connection RequestメッセージとRRC Connection Setup Completeメッセージについては、図35A及びB、図36A及びBに示す内容としてもよい。この場合も、RRC Connection Setupメッセージについては、図29A及びBに示したものと同じである。図35A及びB、図36A及びBに示す例は、図33A及びB、図34A及びBで示したresume IDにおいて、UEコンテクストに対応するUEを認証するための情報を追加するものである。 Also, the RRC Connection Request message and RRC Connection Setup Complete message may have the contents shown in FIGS. 35A and B, and FIGS. 36A and B. Again, the RRCRRConnection Setup message is the same as that shown in FIGS. 29A and 29B. In the examples shown in FIGS. 35A and 35B and FIGS. 36A and 36B, information for authenticating the UE corresponding to the UE context is added to the resume ID shown in FIGS. 33A and 33B and FIGS. 34A and 34B.
 図35Aは、図26のステップ453でUE50から送信されるRRC Connection Requestメッセージの例を示す。 FIG. 35A shows an example of an RRC Connection Request message transmitted from the UE 50 in Step 453 of FIG.
 図35Aに示すように、認証情報であるUE-AS-ConfigIdenityに加えて、resumeIdentity-LSBが追加されている。図35Bに示すように、本例のresumeIdentity-LSBは、UEコンテクスト(AS configuration)と、当該UEコンテクストを格納するeNBを識別し、更に、当該UEコンテクストに対応するUEを認証するためのresume identityにおける最下位(least significant)40ビットである。 As shown in FIG. 35A, resumeIdentity-LSB is added in addition to UE-AS-ConfigIdenity which is authentication information. As illustrated in FIG. 35B, the resumeIdentity-LSB in this example identifies the UE context (AS configuration) and the eNB that stores the UE context, and further resume_identity for authenticating the UE corresponding to the UE context. The least significant 40 bits.
 図36Aは、図26のステップ455でUE50から送信されるRRC Connection Setup Completeメッセージの例を示す。 FIG. 36A shows an example of the RRC Connection Setup message transmitted from the UE 50 in Step 455 of FIG.
 図36Aに示すように、resumeIdentity-MSBが追加されている。図36Bに示すように、本例のresumeIdentity-MSBは、UEコンテクスト(AS configuration)と、 当該UEコンテクストを格納するeNBを識別し、更に、当該UEコンテクストに対応するUEを認証するためのresume identityにおける最上位(most significant)16ビットである。 As shown in FIG. 36A, resumeIdentity-MSB is added. As shown in FIG. 36B, the resumeIdentity-MSB in this example identifies the UE context (AS configuration) and the eNB that stores the UE context, and further resume resume identity for authenticating the UE corresponding to the UE context. Most significant 16 bits.
 (変形例3:UEコンテクスト保持機能判定について)
 図7等を参照して説明したとおり、本実施の形態では、UE50はUEコンテクストを保持していることをeNB10に通知する。これはeNB10がUEコンテクスト保持機能(保持したUEコンテクストを再利用して接続を行う機能、あるいは、Context Fetchにより取得したUEコンテクストを再利用して接続を行う機能)に対応していることを前提としている。
(Variation 3: UE context holding function determination)
As described with reference to FIG. 7 and the like, in the present embodiment, the UE 50 notifies the eNB 10 that the UE context is held. This is based on the premise that the eNB 10 corresponds to a UE context holding function (a function for performing connection by reusing a retained UE context, or a function for performing connection by reusing a UE context acquired by Context Fetch). It is said.
 しかし、全てのeNBがUEコンテクスト保持機能に対応しているとは限らない。例えば、UE50が、eNB10の配下でUEコンテクストを保持したままRRCアイドル状態になって、UEコンテクスト保持機能を保持しないeNB-Xのセルに移動したとする。ここで、UE50がUEコンテクストを保持していることを示す情報をeNB-Xに通知しても、eNB-Xは当該情報を理解できない。安定した動作を行う観点から、UE50は、在圏するセルのeNBがUEコンテクスト保持機能を有することを確認できた場合に、図7等で説明したUEコンテクスト保持通知の動作を行うことが望ましい。 However, not all eNBs support the UE context maintenance function. For example, it is assumed that the UE 50 is in an RRC idle state while holding the UE context under the control of the eNB 10 and moves to an eNB-X cell that does not hold the UE context holding function. Here, even if the information indicating that the UE 50 holds the UE context is notified to the eNB-X, the eNB-X cannot understand the information. From the viewpoint of performing a stable operation, the UE 50 desirably performs the UE context retention notification operation described in FIG. 7 or the like when it is confirmed that the eNB of the cell in the area has the UE context retention function.
 本変形例3では、eNB10がUEコンテクスト保持機能を有するか否かをUE50が判定する例を説明する。変形例3は、変形例1と変形例2と基本例のいずれにも適用可能である。以下では、例1~例3を説明する。なお、変形例3における「UEコンテクスト保持機能」とは、RRC接続状態にない状態において保持しているUEコンテクストを利用(つまり、再利用)して、当該状態からRRC接続を確立させる機能である。また、eNBがUEコンテクスト保持機能を有しない、あるいは、eNBがUEコンテクスト保持機能に対応していない、とは、eNBがUEコンテクスト保持機能を能力として保持しない場合のみならず、能力としては保持するが、当該機能を停止している場合を含む。 In this third modification, an example will be described in which the UE 50 determines whether the eNB 10 has a UE context holding function. The third modification can be applied to any one of the first modification, the second modification, and the basic example. Examples 1 to 3 will be described below. Note that the “UE context maintenance function” in Modification 3 is a function of using (ie, reusing) the UE context held in a state that is not in the RRC connection state and establishing an RRC connection from the state. . In addition, the eNB does not have a UE context holding function, or the eNB does not support the UE context holding function, not only when the eNB does not hold the UE context holding function as a capability, but also as a capability. Includes the case where the function is stopped.
 <例1>
 例1では、eNB10は、eNB10がUEコンテクスト保持機能に対応しているか否かを示す情報を報知情報でUE50に報知する。当該報知情報としては、例えば、MIB、SIB1、SIB2を使用することができる。前述したように、SIB2で報知されるcriticalExtRRC-ConnEstReqAllowedは、当該情報の例である。
<Example 1>
In Example 1, the eNB 10 notifies the UE 50 of information indicating whether or not the eNB 10 is compatible with the UE context holding function using the notification information. As the notification information, for example, MIB, SIB1, and SIB2 can be used. As described above, criticalExtRRC-ConnEstReqAllowed reported by SIB2 is an example of the information.
 図37のフローチャートを参照して、UEコンテクスト保持機能の判定に関するUE50の動作例を説明する。以下の例では、eNB10はSIB1を用いてUEコンテクスト保持機能に対応しているか否かを示す情報を報知する。 With reference to the flowchart of FIG. 37, the operation example of UE50 regarding determination of UE context holding | maintenance function is demonstrated. In the following example, the eNB 10 broadcasts information indicating whether or not the UE context holding function is supported using the SIB1.
 ステップ501において、UE50はeNB10からSIB1を受信する。ステップ502において、UE50は、SIB1から、eNB10がUEコンテクスト保持機能に対応しているか否かを示す情報を読み取り、当該情報に基づいて、eNB10がUEコンテクスト保持機能に対応しているか否かを判定する。 In step 501, the UE 50 receives SIB1 from the eNB 10. In step 502, the UE 50 reads information indicating whether the eNB 10 is compatible with the UE context holding function from the SIB1, and determines whether the eNB 10 is compatible with the UE context holding function based on the information. To do.
 ステップ502の判定結果がYes(対応している)の場合、ステップS503に進み、UE50は、RRC接続状態に遷移する場合に、図7等で説明した手順を実行する。すなわち、UE50は、UEコンテクストを保持していることを示す情報の通知等を行う。なお、図34のS503には、図7に示す手順を実行することが記載されているが、これは例であり、例えば図26に示す手順を実行してもよい。 If the determination result in step 502 is Yes (corresponding), the process proceeds to step S503, and the UE 50 executes the procedure described in FIG. 7 and the like when transitioning to the RRC connection state. That is, the UE 50 performs notification of information indicating that the UE context is held. Note that although S503 in FIG. 34 describes that the procedure shown in FIG. 7 is executed, this is an example, and for example, the procedure shown in FIG. 26 may be executed.
 ステップ502の判定結果がNo(対応していない)の場合、ステップS504に進み、UE50は、RRC接続状態に遷移する場合に、保持しているUEコンテクストを破棄して、スペアビット等を用いない(あるいは、認証情報等を含まない)通常のRRC Connection RequestをeNB10に送信する。 If the determination result in step 502 is No (not supported), the process proceeds to step S504, and the UE 50 discards the held UE context and does not use a spare bit or the like when transitioning to the RRC connection state. A normal RRC Connection Request (or no authentication information or the like) is transmitted to the eNB 10.
 <例2>
 例2では、eNB10は、eNB10がUEコンテクスト保持機能に対応しているか否かを、ランダムアクセス手順におけるRandom Access ResponseでUE50に通知する。
<Example 2>
In Example 2, the eNB 10 notifies the UE 50 by Random Access Response in the random access procedure whether the eNB 10 supports the UE context holding function.
 図38のフローチャートを参照して、例2におけるUE50の動作例を説明する。ここでは、例えば、RRCアイドル状態にあるUE50が、ページングを受けて(あるいは発信を行うために)、RRC接続状態に遷移する場合の状況を示している。 An example of the operation of the UE 50 in Example 2 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. Here, for example, a situation is shown in which the UE 50 in the RRC idle state receives paging (or makes a call) and transitions to the RRC connected state.
 ステップ601において、UE50はeNB10にRandom Access Preambleを送信する。ステップ602において、UE50はeNB10からRandom Access Responseを受信する。当該Random Access Responseには、eNB10がUEコンテクスト保持機能に対応しているか否かを示す情報が含まれている。 In step 601, UE 50 transmits Random Access Preamble to eNB10. In step 602, the UE 50 receives Random Access Response from the eNB 10. The Random Access Response includes information indicating whether the eNB 10 supports the UE context holding function.
 ステップ603において、UE50は、Random Access Responseから、eNB10がUEコンテクスト保持機能に対応しているか否かを示す情報を読み取り、当該情報に基づいて、eNB10がUEコンテクスト保持機能に対応しているか否かを判定する。 In step 603, the UE 50 reads information indicating whether or not the eNB 10 supports the UE context holding function from the Random Access 、 Response, and whether or not the eNB 10 supports the UE context holding function based on the information. Determine.
 ステップ603の判定結果がYes(対応している)の場合、ステップS604に進み、UE50は、図7等で説明した手順を実行する。すなわち、UE50は、UEコンテクストを保持していることを示す情報の通知等を行う。なお、図38のS604には、図7に示す手順を実行することが記載されているが、これは例であり、例えば図26に示す手順を実行してもよい。 When the determination result in step 603 is Yes (corresponding), the process proceeds to step S604, and the UE 50 executes the procedure described in FIG. That is, the UE 50 performs notification of information indicating that the UE context is held. Note that although S604 in FIG. 38 describes that the procedure shown in FIG. 7 is executed, this is an example, and for example, the procedure shown in FIG. 26 may be executed.
 ステップ603の判定結果がNo(対応していない)の場合、ステップS605に進み、UE50は、保持しているUEコンテクストを破棄して、スペアビットを用いない通常のRRC Connection RequestをeNB10に送信する。 If the determination result in step 603 is No (not supported), the process proceeds to step S605, and the UE 50 discards the held UE context and transmits a normal RRC Connection Request that does not use spare bits to the eNB 10 .
 図39、図40は、変形例3の例2におけるRandom Access Responseのメッセージ例を示す(従来例については非特許文献4参照)。図39に示すように、MAC PDUにMAC RARが含まれる。図40に示すように、例2においては、MAC RAR中のリザーブビットを用いて、UEコンテクスト保持機能に対応しているか否かを示す情報を通知する。一例として、ビットが1であれば、UEコンテクスト保持機能に対応していることを示し、0であれば対応していないことを示す。1と0が逆であってもよい。 39 and 40 show examples of Random Access response messages in Example 2 of Modification 3 (see Non-Patent Document 4 for the conventional example). As shown in FIG. 39, MAC RAR is included in the MAC PDU. As shown in FIG. 40, in Example 2, information indicating whether or not the UE context holding function is supported is notified using a reserve bit in the MAC RAR. As an example, if the bit is 1, it indicates that the UE context holding function is supported, and if it is 0, it indicates that it is not supported. 1 and 0 may be reversed.
  <例3>
 例3については、基本例を対象としている。例3では、UE50は、RRC Connection Setupメッセージに、前述したue-ContextStored(eNB10がUE50対応のUEコンテクストを保持していることを示す情報)が含まれているか否かでeNB10におけるUEコンテクスト保持機能対応有無を判定する。
<Example 3>
For example 3, the basic example is targeted. In Example 3, the UE 50 maintains the UE context holding function in the eNB 10 based on whether or not the above-described ue-ContextStored (information indicating that the eNB 10 holds the UE context corresponding to the UE 50) is included in the RRC Connection Setup message. Judge whether or not it is compatible.
 すなわち、例3ではUE50は常にRRC Connection RequestでUEコンテクストを保持していることをeNBに通知して、図7に示す動作を実行する。ただし、ここでは、RRC Connection Setupメッセージに基づいて、eNB10におけるUEコンテクスト保持機能対応有無を判定するのである。 That is, in Example 3, the UE 50 always notifies the eNB that the UE context is held by the RRC Connection Request, and executes the operation shown in FIG. However, here, whether or not the UE context holding function is supported in the eNB 10 is determined based on the RRC Connection Setup message.
 図41のフローチャートを参照して、例3におけるUE50の動作例を説明する。例えば、RRCアイドル状態にあるUE50が、RRC接続状態に遷移しようとする場合に、ステップ701において、UE50は、UEコンテクストを保持していることを示す情報を含むRRC Connection RequestメッセージをeNB10に送信する。 An example of the operation of the UE 50 in Example 3 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. For example, when the UE 50 in the RRC idle state attempts to transition to the RRC connection state, in step 701, the UE 50 transmits an RRC Connection Request message including information indicating that the UE context is held to the eNB 10 .
 ステップ702において、UE50は、eNB10からRRC Connection Setupメッセージを受信する。ステップ703において、UE50は、ue-ContextStoredがRRC Connection Setupメッセージに含まれているか否かの判定を行い、判定結果がYes(含まれている)であればステップ704に進み、判定結果がNo(含まれていない)であればステップ705に進む。 In step 702, the UE 50 receives the RRC Connection Setup message from the eNB10. In step 703, the UE 50 determines whether or not ue-ContextStored is included in the RRC Connection Setup message. If the determination result is Yes (included), the UE 50 proceeds to step 704, and the determination result is No ( If it is not included, the process proceeds to step 705.
 ステップ704において、UE50は、保持していたUEコンテクストを継続使用し、図7のステップ203と同様のRRC Connection Setup CompleteメッセージをeNB10に送信する。 In step 704, the UE 50 continuously uses the held UE context, and transmits an RRC Connection Complete message similar to that in step 203 in FIG.
 ステップ705において、UE50は、保持していたUEコンテクストを破棄し、RRC Connection Setupメッセージに含まれているRadioResourceConfigDedicated内の設定値を反映してUEコンテクスト(ベアラ、MAC config、PHY config等)を作成し、eNB10との接続(通信)に使用する。ステップ705以降、通常のRRC接続手順が実行される。 In step 705, the UE 50 discards the held UE context, and creates a UE context (bearer, MAC config, PHY config, etc.) reflecting the setting value in RadioResourceConfigDedicated included in the RRC Connection Setup message. Used for connection (communication) with the eNB 10. After step 705, the normal RRC connection procedure is executed.
 (RRC Connection Setupメッセージに関する変形例:LCID変形例)
 上述したように、本実施の形態におけるRRC接続確立手順において、UE50は、UEコンテクストを保持していることを示す情報を含むRRC Connection Requestメッセージを送信する。
(Modification regarding RRC Connection Setup message: Modification of LCID)
As described above, in the RRC connection establishment procedure in the present embodiment, UE 50 transmits an RRC Connection Request message including information indicating that the UE context is held.
 ところで、本実施の形態におけるUEとeNB間では、基本的に、データはDRB(Data Radio Bearer)を用いて送受信される。ここでは、この方式を「DRB方式」と呼ぶ。一方、少量のデータが送受信されるIoT(Internet of Things)及びMTC(Machin Type Communication)等への適用を想定して、データをSRB(Signaling Radio Bearer)で送受信する方式が提案されている(非特許文献5)。ここではこの方式を「SRB方式」と呼ぶ。SRB方式は、本実施の形態においても適用可能である。 By the way, between the UE and the eNB in the present embodiment, data is basically transmitted and received using DRB (Data Radio Bearer). Here, this method is called a “DRB method”. On the other hand, a method for transmitting / receiving data using SRB (Signaling Radio Bearer) has been proposed, assuming application to IoT (Internet of Things) and MTC (Machin Type Communication) in which a small amount of data is transmitted and received (non- Patent Document 5). Here, this method is called an “SRB method”. The SRB method can also be applied in this embodiment.
 しかし、eNB側でDRB方式とSRB方式の両方に対応していたとしても、接続するUEがどちらの方式に対応しているかをeNB側で把握しなければ、eNBは適切に動作できないと考えられる。 However, even if both the DRB method and the SRB method are supported on the eNB side, the eNB may not operate properly unless the eNB side knows which method the connected UE supports. .
 そこで、本変形例(LCID変形例と呼ぶ)では、図7(図26でもよい)に示したRRC接続確立手順において、UE50は、RRC Connection Requestメッセージで、DRB方式とSRB方式のそれぞれについて対応しているか否かをeNB10に通知する。しかし、RRC Connection Requestメッセージのサイズを大きくして情報ビットを追加する場合、セル端UEから送信されたRRC Connection RequestメッセージのeNB側での受信品質が下がり、その結果セル端UEの品質劣化、セル半径の縮小につながる可能性がある。本変形例では、以下のようにして通知を行う。 Therefore, in this modified example (referred to as an LCID modified example), in the RRC connection establishment procedure shown in FIG. 7 (or FIG. 26 may be used), the UE 50 responds to each of the DRB method and the SRB method in the RRC Connection Request message. ENB 10 is notified of whether or not However, when the information bit is added by increasing the size of the RRC Connection Request message, the reception quality on the eNB side of the RRC Connection Request message transmitted from the cell edge UE is lowered, and as a result, the quality deterioration of the cell edge UE, the cell It may lead to a reduction in radius. In this modification, notification is performed as follows.
 RRC Connection Requestメッセージは、Random Access Responseに含まれるULグラントで割り当てられるPUSCHのリソースを用いて、MAC PDUにより送信される。また、RRC Connection Requestメッセージは、論理チャネルの観点では、CCCH(Common Control Channel、共通制御チャネル)で送信される。 The RRC Connection Request message is transmitted by the MAC PDU using the PUSCH resource allocated by the UL grant included in the Random Access Response. Further, the RRC Connection Request message is transmitted by CCCH (Common Control Channel, common control channel) from the viewpoint of the logical channel.
 そこで、本変形例では、このMAC PDUに付されているMACヘッダのLCID(Logical Channel ID、論理チャネルID)を使用して、UE10が、DRB方式とSRB方式のそれぞれについて対応しているか否かをeNB10に通知する。 Therefore, in this modification, using the LCID (Logical Channel ID) of the MAC header attached to the MAC PDU, whether the UE 10 supports each of the DRB scheme and the SRB scheme. To the eNB 10.
 本変形例の通信システムのMACに関する動作を規定する仕様(現状の仕様からの変更例)を図42A及びBに示す。現状のMAC仕様(非特許文献4)からの変更箇所に下線が引かれている。 42A and 42B show specifications (examples of changes from the current specifications) that define the operation related to the MAC of the communication system of the present modification. The changes from the current MAC specification (Non-Patent Document 4) are underlined.
 図42A及びBに示すように、UEが、SRB方式のみに対応している場合には、LCID「01100」を用いてCCCHを指定する。UEが、DRB方式のみに対応している場合には、LCID「01101」を用いてCCCHを指定する。UEが、SRB方式とDRB方式の両方に対応している場合には、LCID「01110」を用いてCCCHを指定する。なお、これらの値は一例である。 42A and 42B, when the UE supports only the SRB scheme, the CCCH is specified using the LCID “01100”. When the UE supports only the DRB scheme, the CCCH is specified using the LCID “01101”. When the UE supports both the SRB scheme and the DRB scheme, the CCCH is specified using the LCID “01110”. Note that these values are examples.
 例えば、UE50から、LCID「01100」を指定したMAC PDUでRRC Connection Requestメッセージが送信され、当該RRC Connection RequestメッセージをeNB10が受信すると、eNB10は、UE50がDRB方式のみに対応していることを把握し、DRBを使用したデータ送受信を行う。 For example, when an RRC Connection Request message is transmitted from the UE 50 with a MAC PDU designating the LCID “01100” and the eNB 10 receives the RRC Connection Request message, the eNB 10 recognizes that the UE 50 supports only the DRB method. Then, data transmission / reception using DRB is performed.
 また、UE50から、LCID「01101」を指定したMAC PDUでRRC Connection Requestメッセージが送信され、当該RRC Connection RequestメッセージをeNB10が受信すると、eNB10は、UE50がSRB方式のみに対応していることを把握し、SRBを使用したデータ送受信を行う。 In addition, when the RRC Connection Request message is transmitted from the UE 50 with the MAC PDU specifying the LCID “01101” and the eNB10 receives the RRC Connection Request message, the eNB10 recognizes that the UE50 supports only the SRB scheme. Then, data transmission / reception using the SRB is performed.
 また、UE50から、LCID「01110」を指定したMAC PDUでRRC Connection Requestメッセージが送信され、当該RRC Connection RequestメッセージをeNB10が受信すると、eNB10は、UE50がDRB方式とSRB方式の両方に対応していることを把握する。この場合、例えば、eNB10は、UE50の能力等に応じて、DRB方式とSRB方式のいずれを実行するかを決定する。 In addition, when the RRC Connection Request message is transmitted from the UE 50 with the MAC PDU designating the LCID “01110” and the eNB10 receives the RRC Connection Request message, the eNB10 supports the UE50 in both DRB and SRB methods. Know that you are. In this case, for example, the eNB 10 determines which of the DRB scheme and the SRB scheme is to be executed according to the capability of the UE 50 and the like.
 上記の方式により、RRC Connection Requestメッセージのサイズを増大させることなく、DRB方式/SRB方式の対応可否を通知することができる。 With the above method, it is possible to notify whether the DRB method / SRB method can be supported without increasing the size of the RRC Connection Request message.
 なお、上記の例では、RRC Connection Requestメッセージ送信の際に、LCIDを使用してDRB方式/SRB方式の対応可否を通知することとしているが、これは例であり、CCCHで送信される他のメッセージにおいて、LCIDを使用してDRB方式/SRB方式の対応可否を通知することとしてもよい。 In the above example, when transmitting the RRC Connection Request message, the LCID is used to notify whether the DRB method / SRB method can be supported. In the message, LCID may be used to notify whether the DRB method / SRB method is supported.
  (変形例4:UEコンテクストの保持期間に関する変形例について)
 前述した変形例1で、UE50は、UEコンテクストの保持を開始した時刻から、UEコンテクストを保持する所定の期間Tが経過した時点で、UEコンテクストは無効になったと判断し、当該UEコンテクストを解放(削除)するようにした。つまり、変形例1によれば、UE50は、再選択するセルの無線アクセス技術(RAT:Radio Access Technology)に関わらず、所定の期間Tが満了しない限り、UEコンテクストを保持するように動作する。しかしながら、UE50は、これに限られず、以下に説明する条件に従って、UEコンテクストを解放(削除)するようにしてもよい。なお、セル再選択とは、一旦RRC接続状態からRRCアイドル状態に遷移したUR50が、RRC接続状態に遷移するセルを選択(再度選択)する動作を意図しており、例えば、UE50が他のセルに移動してそのセルを選択する動作、及び、オーバーラップされたセルのうちいずれかのセルを選択する動作を含む。
(Variation 4: Regarding a variation regarding the retention period of the UE context)
In the first modification described above, the UE 50 determines that the UE context has become invalid when a predetermined period T during which the UE context is retained has elapsed from the time when the UE context has been retained, and releases the UE context. (Deleted). That is, according to the first modification, the UE 50 operates to maintain the UE context as long as the predetermined period T does not expire, regardless of the radio access technology (RAT) of the cell to be reselected. However, the UE 50 is not limited to this, and may release (delete) the UE context according to the conditions described below. In addition, cell reselection intends the operation | movement which UR50 which once changed from the RRC connection state to the RRC idle state selects (reselects) the cell which changes to an RRC connection state, for example, UE50 is another cell. And an operation of selecting one of the overlapped cells.
 <例1-1>
 UE50は、セル再選択(cell reselection)を行う際に、再選択するセルがLTE以外のセルである場合(例えば、UMTS、GSM(登録商標)などのLTE以外の他のRATのセルを再選択)に、UEコンテクストを解放(削除)するようにしてもよい。この場合、UEコンテクストを保持しているUE50は、再選択するセルで(LTE以外の他のRATで)RRCコネクションの確立を試みる際(つまり、RRCコネクションの確立要求を基地局に送信する際)に、UEコンテクストを解放(削除)するようにしてもよいし、再選択するセルで(LTE以外の他のRATで)RRCコネクションが確立された後で、UEコンテクストを解放(削除)するようにしてもよい。
<Example 1-1>
When performing cell reselection, the UE 50 reselects a cell other than LTE such as UMTS or GSM (registered trademark) if the cell to be reselected is a cell other than LTE. ), The UE context may be released (deleted). In this case, the UE 50 holding the UE context attempts to establish an RRC connection in a cell to be reselected (with a RAT other than LTE) (that is, when a request to establish an RRC connection is transmitted to the base station). In addition, the UE context may be released (deleted), or the UE context may be released (deleted) after an RRC connection is established in a cell to be reselected (with another RAT other than LTE). May be.
 また、UEコンテクストを保持しているUE50は、再選択するセルで(LTE以外の他のRATで)RRCコネクションを確立するまでに(つまり、再選択するセルでRRCコネクションが確立されるまでの間の任意のタイミングで)、UEコンテクストを解放(削除)するようにしてもよい。この場合の仕様変更例(TS36.304)を図43に示す。 In addition, the UE 50 holding the UE context until the RRC connection is established in the reselecting cell (with other RAT other than LTE) (that is, until the RRC connection is established in the reselecting cell). The UE context may be released (deleted) at any timing. FIG. 43 shows a specification change example (TS36.304) in this case.
 UE50が一旦LTE以外のセルにアクセスした場合、すぐにLTEのセルを再選択する可能性は低いと考えられることから、UE50のメモリ使用量を削減することが可能になる。 When the UE 50 once accesses a cell other than LTE, it is considered that the possibility of reselecting the LTE cell immediately is low, so the memory usage of the UE 50 can be reduced.
 <例1-2>
 UE50は、セル再選択を行う際に、再選択するセルがLTE以外のセルである場合(例えば、UMTS、GSM(登録商標)などのLTE以外の他のRATのセルを再選択)であっても、UEコンテクストを解放(削除)しないようにしてもよい。UE50が一旦LTE以外のセルにアクセスした場合であっても、すぐにLTEのセルを再選択する可能性がある場合に、UEコンテクストを再利用することが可能になる。
<Example 1-2>
When the UE 50 performs cell reselection, the cell to be reselected is a cell other than LTE (for example, reselects a cell other than LTE such as UMTS, GSM (registered trademark)). Alternatively, the UE context may not be released (deleted). Even if the UE 50 once accesses a cell other than LTE, the UE context can be reused when there is a possibility of reselecting the LTE cell immediately.
 <例2-1>
 UE50は、セル再選択を行う際に、再選択するセルがLTEのセルである場合で、かつ、当該セルの報知情報(SIB2)に、eNB10がUEコンテクスト保持機能に対応していることを示す情報が含まれていない場合に、UEコンテクストを解放(削除)するようにしてもよい。また、UE50は、セル再選択を行う際に、再選択するセルがLTEのセルである場合で、かつ、当該セルの報知情報(SIB2)に、eNB10がUEコンテクスト保持機能に対応していることを示す情報が含まれている場合に、UEコンテクストを解放(削除)しないようにしてもよい。eNB10がUEコンテクスト保持機能に対応していることを示す情報は、変形例3の<例1>で説明した、eNB10がUEコンテクスト保持機能に対応しているか否かを示す情報であってもよいし、SIB2に「up-CIOT-EPS-Optimisation」が設定されていることであってもよい(以下の例2-2も同様)。これにより、UE50は、再選択するセルにおいてeNB10がUEコンテクスト保持機能に対応してない場合に、UE50のメモリ使用量を削減することが可能になる。
<Example 2-1>
When performing cell reselection, the UE 50 indicates that the cell to be reselected is an LTE cell, and the broadcast information (SIB2) of the cell indicates that the eNB 10 supports the UE context holding function. If no information is included, the UE context may be released (deleted). In addition, when the UE 50 performs cell reselection, the cell to be reselected is an LTE cell, and the eNB 10 supports the UE context holding function in the broadcast information (SIB2) of the cell. May be prevented from being released (deleted). The information indicating that the eNB 10 is compatible with the UE context holding function may be information indicating whether the eNB 10 is compatible with the UE context holding function described in <Example 1> of the third modification. Alternatively, “up-CIOT-EPS-Optimisation” may be set in SIB2 (the same applies to Example 2-2 below). Accordingly, the UE 50 can reduce the memory usage of the UE 50 when the eNB 10 does not support the UE context holding function in the cell to be reselected.
 なお、変形例3においても、eNB10がUEコンテクスト保持機能に対応しているか否かを示す情報は、SIB2に「up-CIOT-EPS-Optimisation」が設定されているか否かで表現されてもよい。 Note that also in the third modification, the information indicating whether or not the eNB 10 supports the UE context holding function may be expressed by whether or not “up-CIOT-EPS-Optimisation” is set in the SIB2. .
 <例2-2>
 UE50は、セル再選択を行う際に、再選択するセルがLTEのセルである場合、当該セルの報知情報に、eNB10がUEコンテクスト保持機能に対応していることを示す情報が含まれている場合、及び、含まれていない場合のいずれの場合であっても、UEコンテクストを解放(削除)しないようにしてもよい。これにより、eNB10がUEコンテクスト保持機能に対応していない場合であっても、その後に再選択するセルのeNB10がUEコンテクスト保持機能に対応している場合に、UEコンテクストを再利用することが可能になる。図44に、<例2-2>に対応する仕様変更例(TS36.304)を示す。
<Example 2-2>
When the UE 50 performs cell reselection, when the cell to be reselected is an LTE cell, the broadcast information of the cell includes information indicating that the eNB 10 is compatible with the UE context holding function. The UE context may not be released (deleted) regardless of the case and the case where the UE context is not included. Thereby, even when the eNB 10 does not support the UE context holding function, the UE context can be reused when the eNB 10 of the cell to be reselected thereafter supports the UE context holding function. become. FIG. 44 shows a specification change example (TS36.304) corresponding to <Example 2-2>.
 以上、変形例4により、RRCアイドル状態にあるUE50がセル再選択を行う際に、UEコンテクストを保持又は解放する際の条件が明確化されることになる。 As described above, according to the modified example 4, when the UE 50 in the RRC idle state performs cell reselection, the conditions for holding or releasing the UE context are clarified.
 なお、変形例1、変形例4の<例1-1>、<例1-2>、<例2-1>、及び<例2-2>において、"UEコンテクスト"は、"UEコンテクスト及びResumeID"に置き換えてもよい。また、以上の変形例4は、基本例と、変形例1と、変形例2と、変形例3とのいずれにも適用可能である。また、以上の変形例4の<例1-1>又は<例1-2>を、<例2-1>又は<例2-2>と組み合わせるようにしてもよい。 In <Example 1-1>, <Example 1-2>, <Example 2-1>, and <Example 2-2> of Modification 1 and Modification 4, “UE context” It may be replaced with ResumeID ". Moreover, the above modification 4 is applicable to any of the basic example, the modification 1, the modification 2, and the modification 3. Also, <Example 1-1> or <Example 1-2> of Modification 4 above may be combined with <Example 2-1> or <Example 2-2>.
 (装置構成例)
 次に、本発明の実施の形態における装置の構成例を説明する。以下で説明する各装置の構成は、発明の実施の形態に特に関連する機能部のみを示すものであり、少なくともLTE(EPCを含む意味のLTE)に準拠した通信システムにおける装置として動作するための図示しない機能も有するものである。また、各図に示す機能構成は一例に過ぎない。本実施の形態に係る動作を実行できるのであれば、機能区分及び機能部の名称はどのようなものでもよい。
(Device configuration example)
Next, a configuration example of the apparatus in the embodiment of the present invention will be described. The configuration of each device described below shows only a functional unit particularly related to the embodiment of the invention, and operates as a device in a communication system compliant with at least LTE (LTE including EPC). It also has a function not shown. Moreover, the functional configuration shown in each figure is only an example. As long as the operation according to the present embodiment can be executed, the function classification and the name of the function unit may be anything.
  <MME、S-GWの構成例>
 まず、図45を参照して、MME30とS-GW40の構成例を説明する。図45に示すように、MME30は、eNB通信部31、SGW通信部32、通信制御部33を含む。
<Configuration example of MME and S-GW>
First, a configuration example of the MME 30 and the S-GW 40 will be described with reference to FIG. As illustrated in FIG. 45, the MME 30 includes an eNB communication unit 31, an SGW communication unit 32, and a communication control unit 33.
 eNB通信部31は、eNBとの間でS1-MMEインターフェースによる制御信号の送受信を行う機能を含む。SGW通信部32は、S-GWとの間でS11インターフェースによる制御信号の送受信を行う機能を含む。 The eNB communication unit 31 includes a function of transmitting and receiving control signals to and from the eNB through the S1-MME interface. The SGW communication unit 32 includes a function of transmitting / receiving control signals to / from the S-GW through the S11 interface.
 通信制御部33は、eNBからコネクション維持指示信号を受信した場合に、当該コネクション維持指示信号をS-GWに送信するようSGW通信部32に指示するとともに、S-GWから確認応答を受信した場合に、当該確認応答をeNBに送信するようSGW通信部32に指示する機能を含む。 When the communication control unit 33 receives a connection maintenance instruction signal from the eNB, the communication control unit 33 instructs the SGW communication unit 32 to transmit the connection maintenance instruction signal to the S-GW, and receives a confirmation response from the S-GW In addition, the SGW communication unit 32 is instructed to transmit the confirmation response to the eNB.
 図45に示すように、S-GW40は、eNB通信部41、MME通信部42、NW通信部43、通信制御部44を含む。 45, the S-GW 40 includes an eNB communication unit 41, an MME communication unit 42, an NW communication unit 43, and a communication control unit 44.
 eNB通信部41は、eNBとの間でS1-Uインターフェースによるデータの送受信を行う機能を含む。MME通信部42は、MMEとの間でS11インターフェースによる制御信号の送受信を行う機能を含む。NW通信部43は、コアNW側のノード装置との間で制御信号の送受信及びデータの送受信を行う機能を含む。 The eNB communication unit 41 includes a function of transmitting / receiving data to / from the eNB through the S1-U interface. The MME communication unit 42 includes a function for transmitting and receiving control signals to and from the MME through the S11 interface. The NW communication unit 43 includes a function of transmitting / receiving a control signal and transmitting / receiving data to / from a node device on the core NW side.
 通信制御部44は、MMEからコネクション維持指示信号を受信した場合に、確認応答をMMEに送信するようMME通信部42に指示する機能を含む。また、通信制御部44は、MMEからコネクション維持指示信号を受信している場合において、該当UEへの下りデータを受信した場合に、当該下りデータをバッファに保留しておくようにNW通信部43に指示し、RRC接続確立完了をeNBから受信した場合に、当該下りデータを送信するようにNW通信部43に指示する機能を含む。 The communication control unit 44 includes a function of instructing the MME communication unit 42 to transmit a confirmation response to the MME when a connection maintenance instruction signal is received from the MME. Further, when the communication control unit 44 receives the connection maintenance instruction signal from the MME, when receiving the downlink data to the corresponding UE, the NW communication unit 43 holds the downlink data in the buffer. And a function to instruct the NW communication unit 43 to transmit the downlink data when the RRC connection establishment completion is received from the eNB.
 なお、MME30とS-GW40を1つの装置として構成することもできる。その場合、SGW通信部32とMME通信部42間のS11インターフェースの通信は、装置内部の通信となる。 Note that the MME 30 and the S-GW 40 can be configured as one device. In that case, communication of the S11 interface between the SGW communication unit 32 and the MME communication unit 42 is communication inside the apparatus.
 次に、本発明の実施の形態(基本例、変形例1、変形例2、変形例3、LCID変形例を含む)におけるUE50とeNB10の構成例を説明する。なお、以下で説明するUE50とeNB10はそれぞれ、基本例の機能と全ての変形例の機能を有することとしてもよいし、基本例の機能と全ての変形例の機能のうちのいずれか1つの機能を有することとしても良いし、基本例の機能と全ての変形例の機能のうちのいずれか複数の機能を有することとしても良い。 Next, configuration examples of the UE 50 and the eNB 10 in the embodiment of the present invention (including the basic example, the modified example 1, the modified example 2, the modified example 3, and the LCID modified example) will be described. Note that each of the UE 50 and the eNB 10 described below may have the functions of the basic example and all the modified examples, or any one of the functions of the basic example and all the modified examples. It is also possible to have any one of the functions of the basic example and all the modified examples.
  <ユーザ装置UE>
 図46に、ユーザ装置(UE50)の機能構成図を示す。図46に示すように、UE50は、DL信号受信部51、UL信号送信部52、RRC処理部53、UEコンテクスト管理部54を備える。なお、図46は、UE50において本発明に特に関連する機能部のみを示すものであり、UE50は、少なくともLTEに準拠した動作を行うための図示しない機能も有するものである。
<User device UE>
In FIG. 46, the functional block diagram of a user apparatus (UE50) is shown. As illustrated in FIG. 46, the UE 50 includes a DL signal reception unit 51, a UL signal transmission unit 52, an RRC processing unit 53, and a UE context management unit 54. FIG. 46 shows only functional units that are particularly relevant to the present invention in the UE 50, and the UE 50 also has a function (not shown) for performing an operation based on at least LTE.
 DL信号受信部51は、基地局eNBから各種の下り信号を受信し、受信した物理レイヤの信号からより上位のレイヤの情報を取得する機能を含み、UL信号送信部52は、UE50から送信されるべき上位のレイヤの情報から、物理レイヤの各種信号を生成し、基地局eNBに対して送信する機能を含む。また、UL信号送信部52は、RRC Connection Requestメッセージ等の送信の際に、LCIDを使用してDRB方式/SRB方式の対応可否をeNB10に通知する機能を含む。 The DL signal receiving unit 51 includes a function of receiving various downlink signals from the base station eNB and acquiring higher layer information from the received physical layer signal, and the UL signal transmitting unit 52 is transmitted from the UE 50. It includes a function of generating various signals of the physical layer from information on higher layers to be transmitted and transmitting the signals to the base station eNB. In addition, the UL signal transmission unit 52 includes a function of notifying the eNB 10 of the availability of the DRB method / SRB method using the LCID when transmitting an RRC 送信 Connection Request message or the like.
 RRC処理部53は、図7、図8、図10~図41等を参照して説明した、UE側の判定処理、RRCメッセージの生成・送信(送信はUL信号送信部52を介した送信)、DL信号受信部51により受信したRRCメッセージの解釈、解釈に基づく動作等を行う。また、図38~図40を参照して説明したランダムアクセス手順におけるMAC信号の送受信は、DL信号受信部51とUL信号送信部52により行うこととしてもよい。また、RRC処理部53は、UEコンテクスト管理部54に保持しておいたUEコンテクストを利用してRRC接続を再開する機能等も含む。この再開機能としては、例えば、変形例1において、アクティベーションの指示をeNBから受信した場合におけるUEコンテクスト有効化の処理機能がある。 The RRC processing unit 53 is described with reference to FIG. 7, FIG. 8, FIG. 10 to FIG. 41, etc., UE side determination processing, RRC message generation / transmission (transmission is performed via the UL signal transmission unit 52) The RRC message received by the DL signal receiving unit 51 is interpreted, and an operation based on the interpretation is performed. In addition, transmission / reception of the MAC signal in the random access procedure described with reference to FIGS. 38 to 40 may be performed by the DL signal receiving unit 51 and the UL signal transmitting unit 52. The RRC processing unit 53 also includes a function of resuming the RRC connection using the UE context held in the UE context management unit 54. As the restart function, for example, in the first modification, there is a UE context validation processing function when an activation instruction is received from the eNB.
 UEコンテクスト管理部54は、メモリ等の記憶手段を含み、例えば、図8で説明した指示に基づいて、RRCアイドル状態においてUEコンテクスト及びUE識別子(S-TMSI等)を保持する。また、図7、図26等に示す手順においては、UEコンテクストの保持の有無を判断し、UEコンテクストを保持している場合には、UEコンテクストを保持していることを示す情報を通知するよう、RRC処理部53に指示する。また、UEコンテクスト管理部54は、RRC接続状態からRRCアイドル状態になった時刻から、RRCアイドル状態のまま予め定めた時間(T)が経過した場合に、保持しているUEコンテクストを無効と見なし、UEコンテクストを解放する機能を含む。また、UEコンテクスト管理部54は、再選択するセルの無線アクセス技術(例えば、GSM(登録商標)、UMTS、LTEなど)に応じて、UEコンテクストを無効とみなして解放するか否かを選択する機能を含む。また、UEコンテクスト管理部54は、再選択するセルの無線アクセス技術がLTEである場合、eNB10がUEコンテクストを解放する機能に対応しているか否かに基づいて、UEコンテクストを無効とみなして解放するか否かを選択する機能を含む。また、UEコンテクスト管理部54は、UEコンテクストを保持しながら現在のRATとは異なるRATでセル再選択を行う場合、当該異なるRATで(再選択するセルで)RRCコネクションが確立されるまでの間にUEコンテクストを解放(削除)する機能を含む。 The UE context management unit 54 includes storage means such as a memory, and holds a UE context and a UE identifier (S-TMSI or the like) in the RRC idle state based on the instruction described in FIG. Further, in the procedures shown in FIG. 7, FIG. 26, etc., it is determined whether or not the UE context is held, and when the UE context is held, information indicating that the UE context is held is notified. The RRC processing unit 53 is instructed. Further, the UE context management unit 54 regards the held UE context as invalid when a predetermined time (T) has elapsed in the RRC idle state from the time when the RRC connected state has changed to the RRC idle state. , Including the ability to release the UE context. Further, the UE context management unit 54 selects whether to release the UE context as invalid according to the radio access technology (for example, GSM (registered trademark), UMTS, LTE, etc.) of the cell to be reselected. Includes functionality. Further, when the radio access technology of the cell to be reselected is LTE, the UE context management unit 54 regards the UE context as invalid based on whether or not the eNB 10 supports the function of releasing the UE context, and releases the UE context. It includes a function to select whether or not to do. In addition, when the UE context management unit 54 performs cell reselection with a RAT different from the current RAT while holding the UE context, the UE context management unit 54 is in a period until the RRC connection is established with the different RAT (in the cell to be reselected). Includes a function to release (delete) the UE context.
 図46に示すUE50の構成は、全体をハードウェア回路(例:1つ又は複数のICチップ)で実現してもよいし、一部をハードウェア回路で構成し、その他の部分をCPUとプログラムとで実現してもよい。 The configuration of the UE 50 shown in FIG. 46 may be entirely realized by a hardware circuit (eg, one or a plurality of IC chips), a part is constituted by a hardware circuit, and the other part is a CPU and a program. And may be realized.
 図47は、UE50のハードウェア(HW)構成の例を示す図である。図47は、図46よりも実装例に近い構成を示している。図47に示すように、UE50は、無線信号に関する処理を行うRE(Radio Equipment)モジュール151と、ベースバンド信号処理を行うBB(Base Band)処理モジュール152と、上位レイヤ等の処理を行う装置制御モジュール153と、USIMカードにアクセスするインタフェースであるUSIMスロット154とを有する。 FIG. 47 is a diagram illustrating an example of the hardware (HW) configuration of the UE 50. FIG. 47 shows a configuration closer to the mounting example than FIG. As shown in FIG. 47, the UE 50 performs device control that performs processing such as an RE (Radio Equipment) module 151 that performs processing related to a radio signal, a BB (Base Band) processing module 152 that performs baseband signal processing, and higher layer processing. It has a module 153 and a USIM slot 154 which is an interface for accessing a USIM card.
 REモジュール151は、BB処理モジュール152から受信したデジタルベースバンド信号に対して、D/A(Digital-to-Analog)変換、変調、周波数変換、及び電力増幅等を行うことでアンテナから送信すべき無線信号を生成する。また、受信した無線信号に対して、周波数変換、A/D(Analog to Digital)変換、復調等を行うことでデジタルベースバンド信号を生成し、BB処理モジュール152に渡す。REモジュール151は、例えば、図46のDL信号受信部51及びUL信号送信部52における物理レイヤ等の機能を含む。 The RE module 151 should transmit from the antenna by performing D / A (Digital-to-Analog) conversion, modulation, frequency conversion, power amplification, etc. on the digital baseband signal received from the BB processing module 152 Generate a radio signal. In addition, a digital baseband signal is generated by performing frequency conversion, A / D (Analog to Digital) conversion, demodulation, and the like on the received wireless signal, and the digital baseband signal is passed to the BB processing module 152. The RE module 151 includes functions such as a physical layer in the DL signal receiving unit 51 and the UL signal transmitting unit 52 in FIG. 46, for example.
 BB処理モジュール152は、IPパケットとデジタルベースバンド信号とを相互に変換する処理を行う。DSP(Digital Signal Processor)162は、BB処理モジュール152における信号処理を行うプロセッサである。メモリ172は、DSP162のワークエリアとして使用される。BB処理モジュール152は、例えば、図46のDL信号受信部51及びUL信号送信部52におけるレイヤ2等の機能、RRC処理部53及びUEコンテクスト管理部54を含む。なお、RRC処理部53及びUEコンテクスト管理部54の機能の全部又は一部を装置制御モジュール153に含めることとしてもよい。 The BB processing module 152 performs processing for mutually converting an IP packet and a digital baseband signal. A DSP (Digital Signal Processor) 162 is a processor that performs signal processing in the BB processing module 152. The memory 172 is used as a work area for the DSP 162. The BB processing module 152 includes, for example, functions such as layer 2 in the DL signal reception unit 51 and the UL signal transmission unit 52 in FIG. 46, an RRC processing unit 53, and a UE context management unit 54. Note that all or part of the functions of the RRC processing unit 53 and the UE context management unit 54 may be included in the device control module 153.
 装置制御モジュール153は、IPレイヤのプロトコル処理、各種アプリケーションの処理等を行う。プロセッサ163は、装置制御モジュール153が行う処理を行うプロセッサである。メモリ173は、プロセッサ163のワークエリアとして使用される。また、プロセッサ163は、USIMスロット154を介してUSIMとの間でデータの読出し及び書込みを行う。 The device control module 153 performs IP layer protocol processing, various application processing, and the like. The processor 163 is a processor that performs processing performed by the device control module 153. The memory 173 is used as a work area for the processor 163. The processor 163 reads and writes data with the USIM through the USIM slot 154.
  <基地局eNB>
 図48に、基地局eNB(eNB10)の機能構成図を示す。ここで、図48は、変形例2のcontext fetchの機能については図示していない。図48に示すように、eNB10は、DL信号送信部11、UL信号受信部12、RRC処理部13、UEコンテクスト管理部14、認証部15、NW通信部16を備える。なお、図48は、eNB10において本発明の実施の形態に特に関連する機能部のみを示すものであり、eNB10は、少なくともLTE方式に準拠した動作を行うための図示しない機能も有するものである。
<Base station eNB>
FIG. 48 shows a functional configuration diagram of the base station eNB (eNB 10). Here, FIG. 48 does not illustrate the context fetch function of the second modification. As illustrated in FIG. 48, the eNB 10 includes a DL signal transmission unit 11, a UL signal reception unit 12, an RRC processing unit 13, a UE context management unit 14, an authentication unit 15, and an NW communication unit 16. FIG. 48 shows only functional units that are particularly related to the embodiment of the present invention in the eNB 10, and the eNB 10 also has a function (not shown) for performing at least an operation based on the LTE scheme.
 DL信号送信部11は、eNB10から送信されるべき上位のレイヤの情報から、物理レイヤの各種信号を生成し、送信する機能を含む。UL信号受信部12は、ユーザ装置UEから各種の上り信号を受信し、受信した物理レイヤの信号からより上位のレイヤの情報を取得する機能を含む。UL信号受信部12は、UE50から受信するMAC PDUのMACヘッダにおけるLCIDに基づき、UE50におけるDRB方式/SRB方式の対応可否を決定する機能を含む。 The DL signal transmission unit 11 includes a function of generating and transmitting various physical layer signals from upper layer information to be transmitted from the eNB 10. The UL signal receiving unit 12 includes a function of receiving various uplink signals from the user apparatus UE and acquiring higher layer information from the received physical layer signals. The UL signal receiving unit 12 includes a function for determining whether or not the UE 50 can support the DRB scheme / SRB scheme based on the LCID in the MAC header of the MAC PDU received from the UE 50.
 RRC処理部13は、図7、図8、図10~図41等を参照して説明した、eNB側の判定処理、RRCメッセージ及び報知情報の生成・送信(送信はDL信号送信部11を介した送信)、UL信号受信部12により受信したRRCメッセージの解釈、解釈に基づく動作等を行う。また、図38~図40を参照して説明したランダムアクセス手順におけるMAC信号の送受信は、DL信号送信部11とUL信号受信部12により行うこととしてもよい。また、RRC処理部13は、UEコンテクスト管理部14に保持しておいたUEコンテクストを利用してRRC接続を再開する機能等も含む。 The RRC processing unit 13 is described with reference to FIG. 7, FIG. 8, FIG. 10 to FIG. 41, and the like, determination processing on the eNB side, generation / transmission of RRC message and broadcast information (transmission is via the DL signal transmission unit 11). Transmission), interpretation of the RRC message received by the UL signal receiving unit 12, operations based on the interpretation, and the like are performed. Further, transmission / reception of the MAC signal in the random access procedure described with reference to FIGS. 38 to 40 may be performed by the DL signal transmission unit 11 and the UL signal reception unit 12. In addition, the RRC processing unit 13 includes a function of resuming the RRC connection using the UE context held in the UE context management unit 14.
 UEコンテクスト管理部14は、メモリ等の記憶手段を含み、例えば、図8で説明した指示の送信に基づいて、RRCアイドル状態においてUEコンテクスト及びUE識別子(S-TMSI等)を保持する。また、図7に示す手順においては、UEから受信するUE識別子に基づいて、UEコンテクストを検索し、UEコンテクストが保持されていることを確認したら、UEコンテクストが保持されていることを示す通知、及び、認証情報の要求をRRC処理部13に指示する。また、変形例1においては、UEコンテクスト管理部14は、UEから受信する認証情報に基づいて、認証部15に認証を指示し、認証OKであれば、UE50のUEコンテクストを検索し、UEコンテクストが保持されていることを確認したら、UEコンテクストをアクティベートすることをUE50に指示するメッセージの作成、送信をRRC処理部13に指示する。また、UEコンテクスト管理部14は、UE50がRRC接続状態からRRCアイドル状態になった時刻から、RRCアイドル状態のまま予め定めた時間(T)が経過した場合に、保持しているUEコンテクストを無効と見なし、UEコンテクストを解放する機能を含む。 The UE context management unit 14 includes storage means such as a memory, and holds the UE context and the UE identifier (S-TMSI or the like) in the RRC idle state based on, for example, transmission of the instruction described in FIG. In the procedure shown in FIG. 7, the UE context is searched based on the UE identifier received from the UE, and after confirming that the UE context is retained, a notification indicating that the UE context is retained; Then, the RRC processing unit 13 is instructed to request authentication information. Further, in the first modification, the UE context management unit 14 instructs the authentication unit 15 to perform authentication based on the authentication information received from the UE. If the authentication is OK, the UE context management unit 14 searches for the UE context of the UE 50, and UE context Is confirmed, the RRC processing unit 13 is instructed to create and transmit a message for instructing the UE 50 to activate the UE context. In addition, the UE context management unit 14 invalidates the held UE context when a predetermined time (T) elapses in the RRC idle state from the time when the UE 50 changes from the RRC connected state to the RRC idle state. And includes the function of releasing the UE context.
 認証部15は、基本例において、図7に示したステップ203において、UEから認証情報を受信し、UEの認証を行う機能を含む。また、認証部15は、変形例1において、図7に示したステップ201でUEから送信される認証情報に基づいてUEの認証を行う。 In the basic example, the authentication unit 15 includes a function of receiving authentication information from the UE and authenticating the UE in Step 203 shown in FIG. Moreover, the authentication part 15 authenticates UE based on the authentication information transmitted from UE in the modification 201 in step 201 shown in FIG.
 NW通信部16は、S1-MMEインターフェースでMMEとの間で制御信号を送受信する機能、及び、S1-UインターフェースでS-GWとの間でデータを送受信する機能、コネクション維持指示信号の送信機能、RRC接続確立完了の送信の送信機能等を含む。 The NW communication unit 16 has a function of transmitting / receiving a control signal to / from the MME via the S1-MME interface, a function of transmitting / receiving data to / from the S-GW via the S1-U interface, and a function of transmitting a connection maintenance instruction signal , A transmission function for transmitting RRC connection establishment completion, and the like.
 図49に、変形例2における基地局eNB(eNB10)の機能構成図を示す。以下では、主に、図48のeNB10と異なる点について説明する。図49のeNB10では、図48の構成に対してUEコンテクスト取得部17が追加されている。 FIG. 49 shows a functional configuration diagram of the base station eNB (eNB 10) in the second modification. In the following, differences from the eNB 10 of FIG. 48 will be mainly described. In the eNB 10 of FIG. 49, a UE context acquisition unit 17 is added to the configuration of FIG.
 RRC処理部13は、例えば図26、図27に示したステップ453~455、471~474のメッセージ送受信動作を、DL信号送信部11及びUL信号受信部12とともに実行する。 The RRC processing unit 13 executes the message transmission / reception operations in steps 453 to 455 and 471 to 474 shown in FIGS. 26 and 27 together with the DL signal transmission unit 11 and the UL signal reception unit 12, for example.
 UEコンテクスト取得部17は、例えば、UEコンテクストを保持するUEとの間でRRC接続を確立するために必要なUEコンテクストがUEコンテクスト管理部14に格納されていない場合において、コンテクスト取得手順を実行する(図26のステップ460、図27のステップ461、462)。また、UEコンテクスト取得部17は、他の基地局から、コンテクスト要求メッセージを受信したときに、対象のUEコンテクストを特定する情報に基づいて、当該UEコンテクストをUEコンテクスト管理部14から取得して、当該他の基地局に返す機能を有する。 For example, the UE context acquisition unit 17 executes the context acquisition procedure when the UE context necessary for establishing the RRC connection with the UE that holds the UE context is not stored in the UE context management unit 14. (Step 460 in FIG. 26, Steps 461 and 462 in FIG. 27). In addition, when receiving a context request message from another base station, the UE context acquisition unit 17 acquires the UE context from the UE context management unit 14 based on information identifying the target UE context, It has a function of returning to the other base station.
 図48、47に示すeNB10の構成は、全体をハードウェア回路(例:1つ又は複数のICチップ)で実現してもよいし、一部をハードウェア回路で構成し、その他の部分をCPUとプログラムとで実現してもよい。 The configuration of the eNB 10 shown in FIGS. 48 and 47 may be entirely realized by a hardware circuit (eg, one or a plurality of IC chips), or a part may be configured by a hardware circuit and the other part may be a CPU. And a program.
 図50は、eNB10のハードウェア(HW)構成の例を示す図である。図50は、図48、47よりも実装例に近い構成を示している。図50に示すように、eNB10は、無線信号に関する処理を行うREモジュール251と、ベースバンド信号処理を行うBB処理モジュール252と、上位レイヤ等の処理を行う装置制御モジュール253と、ネットワークと接続するためのインタフェースである通信IF254とを有する。 FIG. 50 is a diagram illustrating an example of a hardware (HW) configuration of the eNB 10. FIG. 50 shows a configuration closer to the mounting example than FIGS. As illustrated in FIG. 50, the eNB 10 is connected to the network by an RE module 251 that performs processing related to a radio signal, a BB processing module 252 that performs baseband signal processing, a device control module 253 that performs processing such as an upper layer, and the like. And a communication IF 254 which is an interface for this purpose.
 REモジュール251は、BB処理モジュール252から受信したデジタルベースバンド信号に対して、D/A変換、変調、周波数変換、及び電力増幅等を行うことでアンテナから送信すべき無線信号を生成する。また、受信した無線信号に対して、周波数変換、A/D変換、復調等を行うことでデジタルベースバンド信号を生成し、BB処理モジュール252に渡す。REモジュール251は、例えば、図48、47のDL信号送信部11及びUL信号受信部12における物理レイヤ等の機能を含む。 The RE module 251 generates a radio signal to be transmitted from the antenna by performing D / A conversion, modulation, frequency conversion, power amplification, and the like on the digital baseband signal received from the BB processing module 252. In addition, a digital baseband signal is generated by performing frequency conversion, A / D conversion, demodulation, and the like on the received radio signal, and passed to the BB processing module 252. The RE module 251 includes functions such as a physical layer in the DL signal transmission unit 11 and the UL signal reception unit 12 in FIGS.
 BB処理モジュール252は、IPパケットとデジタルベースバンド信号とを相互に変換する処理を行う。DSP262は、BB処理モジュール252における信号処理を行うプロセッサである。メモリ272は、DSP252のワークエリアとして使用される。BB処理モジュール252は、例えば、図48、47のDL信号送信部11及びUL信号受信部12におけるレイヤ2等の機能、RRC処理部13、UEコンテクスト管理部14、認証部15、UEコンテクスト取得部17を含む。なお、RRC処理部13、UEコンテクスト管理部14、認証部15、UEコンテクスト取得部17の機能の全部又は一部を装置制御モジュール253に含めることとしてもよい。 The BB processing module 252 performs processing for mutually converting an IP packet and a digital baseband signal. The DSP 262 is a processor that performs signal processing in the BB processing module 252. The memory 272 is used as a work area for the DSP 252. The BB processing module 252 includes, for example, functions such as layer 2 in the DL signal transmission unit 11 and the UL signal reception unit 12 in FIGS. 48 and 47, an RRC processing unit 13, a UE context management unit 14, an authentication unit 15, and a UE context acquisition unit. 17 is included. Note that all or part of the functions of the RRC processing unit 13, the UE context management unit 14, the authentication unit 15, and the UE context acquisition unit 17 may be included in the device control module 253.
 装置制御モジュール253は、IPレイヤのプロトコル処理、OAM処理等を行う。プロセッサ263は、装置制御モジュール253が行う処理を行うプロセッサである。メモリ273は、プロセッサ263のワークエリアとして使用される。補助記憶装置283は、例えばHDD等であり、基地局eNB自身が動作するための各種設定情報等が格納される。 The device control module 253 performs IP layer protocol processing, OAM processing, and the like. The processor 263 is a processor that performs processing performed by the device control module 253. The memory 273 is used as a work area for the processor 263. The auxiliary storage device 283 is an HDD, for example, and stores various setting information for the base station eNB itself to operate.
 なお、図45~図50に示す装置の構成(機能区分)は、本実施の形態(基本例、変形例1、2を含む)で説明する処理を実現する構成の一例に過ぎない。本実施の形態(基本例、変形例1、2を含む)で説明する処理を実現できるのであれば、その実装方法(具体的な機能部の配置、名称等)は、特定の実装方法に限定されない。 It should be noted that the configuration (functional category) of the apparatus shown in FIGS. 45 to 50 is merely an example of a configuration that realizes the processing described in the present embodiment (including the basic example and the first and second modifications). If the processing described in the present embodiment (including basic examples and modifications 1 and 2) can be realized, the mounting method (specific functional unit arrangement, names, etc.) is limited to a specific mounting method. Not.
 (実施の形態のまとめ)
 以上説明したとおり、本実施の形態により、ユーザ装置と基地局のそれぞれに保持されるコンテクスト情報を再利用して接続確立を行う機能をサポートする移動通信システムにおける前記ユーザ装置であって、前記ユーザ装置がユーザ装置側コンテクスト情報を保持していることを示す第1コンテクスト保持情報を含む接続要求メッセージを、前記基地局に送信する送信手段と、前記基地局が前記ユーザ装置に対応付けられた基地局側コンテクスト情報を保持していることを示す第2コンテクスト保持情報を含む接続設定メッセージを、前記基地局から受信する受信手段と、前記接続設定メッセージを受信した後、前記ユーザ装置側コンテクスト情報を利用して、前記基地局との間で接続を確立する接続手段とを備えるユーザ装置が提供される。
(Summary of embodiment)
As described above, according to the present embodiment, the user apparatus in the mobile communication system that supports a function of establishing a connection by reusing context information held in each of the user apparatus and the base station, the user apparatus Transmitting means for transmitting to the base station a connection request message including first context holding information indicating that the device holds user apparatus side context information; and a base in which the base station is associated with the user apparatus. Receiving means for receiving a connection setting message including second context holding information indicating that the station side context information is held from the base station; and after receiving the connection setting message, the user apparatus side context information is And a user device comprising a connection means for establishing a connection with the base station. .
 上記の構成により、ユーザ装置と基地局のそれぞれに保持されるコンテクスト情報を再利用して接続確立を行う機能をサポートする移動通信システムにおいて、ユーザ装置がコンテクスト情報を保持しているか否かを基地局により判定することが可能となる。 With the above configuration, in a mobile communication system that supports a function of establishing a connection by reusing context information held in each of the user apparatus and the base station, it is determined whether the user apparatus holds the context information. It can be determined by the station.
 前記接続設定メッセージは、前記第2コンテクスト保持情報に加えて、前記ユーザ装置に対する認証情報の送信要求を含み、前記送信手段は、当該送信要求に基づいて、認証情報を前記基地局に送信することとしてもよい。この構成により、基地局がユーザ装置を認証してから接続を確立することができる。 The connection setting message includes a request for transmitting authentication information to the user apparatus in addition to the second context holding information, and the transmission means transmits authentication information to the base station based on the transmission request. It is good. With this configuration, the connection can be established after the base station authenticates the user apparatus.
 前記送信手段は、例えば、前記認証情報を含む接続設定完了メッセージを前記基地局に送信する。この構成により、認証情報を特別なメッセージで送る必要がなくなり、メッセージを削減できる。 The transmission means transmits, for example, a connection setting completion message including the authentication information to the base station. With this configuration, it is not necessary to send authentication information in a special message, and messages can be reduced.
 前記送信手段は、前記ユーザ装置の認証情報を前記第1コンテクスト保持情報として含む接続要求メッセージを、前記基地局に送信することとしてもよい。この構成により、接続設定を実施する前(RRC接続がなされる前)に認証情報を送信することができる。 The transmitting unit may transmit a connection request message including authentication information of the user device as the first context holding information to the base station. With this configuration, authentication information can be transmitted before connection setting is performed (before RRC connection is made).
 前記受信手段は、前記ユーザ装置側コンテクスト情報をアクティブ化する指示情報を前記第2コンテクスト保持情報として含む接続設定メッセージを、前記基地局から受信することとしてもよい。この構成により、ユーザ装置は、ユーザ装置側コンテクスト情報をアクティブ化する指示情報を受信するか否かにより、基地局がコンテクスト情報を保持しているか否かを判断できる。 The reception unit may receive a connection setting message including instruction information for activating the user apparatus side context information as the second context holding information from the base station. With this configuration, the user apparatus can determine whether or not the base station holds the context information based on whether or not the instruction information for activating the user apparatus side context information is received.
 前記受信手段は、前記ユーザ装置を接続状態からアイドル状態に遷移させる接続解放メッセージを前記基地局から受信し、当該接続解放メッセージの中から、前記ユーザ装置側コンテクスト情報を保持することを指示する情報を検知した場合に、前記アイドル状態の間、前記ユーザ装置側コンテクスト情報を記憶手段に保持することとしてもよい。この構成により、ユーザ装置は、指示を受けない場合には、ユーザ装置側コンテクスト情報を保持しなくてもよく、無駄にユーザ装置側コンテクスト情報を保持することを回避できる。 The receiving means receives from the base station a connection release message that causes the user apparatus to transition from a connected state to an idle state, and instructs to hold the user apparatus side context information from the connection release message In the idle state, the user device-side context information may be held in the storage unit. With this configuration, when the user device does not receive an instruction, the user device does not need to hold the user device-side context information, and can avoid holding the user device-side context information unnecessarily.
 また、ユーザ装置は、前記ユーザ装置が接続状態からアイドル状態に遷移した時点から、アイドル状態のまま所定の時間が経過した場合に、前記記憶手段に保持された前記ユーザ装置側コンテクスト情報を無効とする管理手段を備えることとしてもよい。この構成により、例えば、アイドル状態が長く継続するような場合において、ユーザ装置側コンテクスト情報を保持し続けることを回避できる。 In addition, the user device invalidates the user device side context information held in the storage unit when a predetermined time has passed in the idle state from the time when the user device transitioned from the connected state to the idle state. It is good also as providing the management means to do. With this configuration, for example, when the idle state continues for a long time, it is possible to avoid holding the user apparatus side context information.
 また、前記ユーザ装置が接続状態からアイドル状態に遷移した場合に、再度接続状態に遷移するために選択するセルの無線アクセス技術に応じて、前記記憶手段に保持された前記ユーザ装置側コンテクスト情報を無効とするか否かを選択する管理手段を備えることとしてもよい。この構成により、例えば、再選択するセルがLTEではない場合に、ユーザ装置側コンテクスト情報を保持し続けることを回避できる。 In addition, when the user apparatus transitions from the connected state to the idle state, the user apparatus side context information held in the storage unit is stored in accordance with the radio access technology of the cell selected to transition to the connected state again. Management means for selecting whether or not to invalidate may be provided. With this configuration, for example, when the cell to be reselected is not LTE, it is possible to avoid holding the user apparatus side context information.
 また、本実施の形態によれば、ユーザ装置と基地局のそれぞれに保持されるコンテクスト情報を再利用して接続確立を行う機能をサポートする移動通信システムにおける前記ユーザ装置であって、前記ユーザ装置がユーザ装置側コンテクスト情報を保持していることを示す第1識別子を含む接続要求メッセージを、前記基地局に送信する送信手段と、第2識別子の要求が含まれた接続設定メッセージを、前記基地局から受信する受信手段と、を備え、前記送信手段は、前記第2識別子を含む接続設定完了メッセージを前記基地局に送信することを特徴とするユーザ装置が提供される。第1識別子又は第2識別子は、例えば、ユーザ装置のコンテクスト情報と、当該コンテクスト情報を保持する基地局を識別するために用いられる識別子である。また、第1識別子又は第2識別子が、当該コンテクスト情報に対応するユーザ装置を認証する情報を含んでもよい。 Moreover, according to the present embodiment, the user apparatus in the mobile communication system that supports a function of establishing a connection by reusing context information held in each of the user apparatus and the base station, the user apparatus Transmitting a connection request message including a first identifier indicating that the user apparatus side context information is held to the base station, and a connection setting message including a request for a second identifier. Receiving means for receiving from a station, wherein the transmitting means transmits a connection setup completion message including the second identifier to the base station. A 1st identifier or a 2nd identifier is an identifier used in order to identify the base station which hold | maintains the context information of a user apparatus, and the said context information, for example. Further, the first identifier or the second identifier may include information for authenticating the user device corresponding to the context information.
 また、本実施の形態により、ユーザ装置と基地局のそれぞれに保持されるコンテクスト情報を再利用して接続確立を行う機能をサポートする移動通信システムにおける前記基地局であって、前記ユーザ装置がユーザ装置側コンテクスト情報を保持していることを示す第1コンテクスト保持情報を含む接続要求メッセージを、前記ユーザ装置から受信する受信手段と、前記接続要求メッセージを受信したことに応じて、前記基地局が前記ユーザ装置に対応付けられた基地局側コンテクスト情報を保持していることを示す第2コンテクスト保持情報を含む接続設定メッセージを、前記ユーザ装置に送信する送信手段と、前記接続設定メッセージを送信した後、前記基地局側コンテクスト情報を利用して、前記ユーザ装置との間で接続を確立する接続手段とを備える基地局が提供される。 Further, according to the present embodiment, the base station in the mobile communication system that supports a function of establishing a connection by reusing context information held in each of the user apparatus and the base station, wherein the user apparatus is a user In response to receiving the connection request message from the user apparatus, the base station receives a connection request message including the first context holding information indicating that the apparatus side context information is held. A transmission means for transmitting a connection setting message including second context holding information indicating that the base station side context information associated with the user apparatus is held to the user apparatus; and the connection setting message is transmitted. Then, the base station side context information is used to establish a connection with the user apparatus. Base station is provided with a connection means.
 上記の構成により、ユーザ装置と基地局のそれぞれに保持されるコンテクスト情報を再利用して接続確立を行う機能をサポートする移動通信システムにおいて、ユーザ装置がコンテクスト情報を保持しているか否かを基地局により判定することが可能となる。 With the above configuration, in a mobile communication system that supports a function of establishing a connection by reusing context information held in each of the user apparatus and the base station, it is determined whether the user apparatus holds the context information. It can be determined by the station.
 前記受信手段は、例えば、前記接続要求メッセージから前記ユーザ装置の識別子を取得し、保持される複数の基地局側コンテクスト情報から、当該識別子に対応する基地局側コンテクスト情報を検索する。このように、識別子を使用することで、確実にユーザ装置に対応付けられた基地局側コンテクスト情報を検出することができる。 The receiving unit acquires, for example, the identifier of the user apparatus from the connection request message, and searches the base station side context information corresponding to the identifier from the plurality of base station side context information held. In this way, by using the identifier, it is possible to reliably detect the base station side context information associated with the user apparatus.
 前記接続設定メッセージは、前記第2コンテクスト保持情報に加えて、前記ユーザ装置に対する認証情報の送信要求を含み、前記送信要求に基づいて、前記ユーザ装置から送信された認証情報を用いて前記ユーザ装置の認証を行う認証手段を備えてもよい。この構成により、基地局がユーザ装置を認証してから接続を確立することができる。 The connection setting message includes, in addition to the second context holding information, a request for transmitting authentication information to the user device, and based on the transmission request, the user device using the authentication information transmitted from the user device. Authentication means for performing the authentication may be provided. With this configuration, the connection can be established after the base station authenticates the user apparatus.
 前記受信手段は、前記ユーザ装置の認証情報を前記第1コンテクスト保持情報として含む接続要求メッセージを、前記ユーザ装置から受信することとしてもよい。この構成により、接続設定を実施する前(RRC接続がなされる前)に認証情報を受信し、ユーザ装置の認証を行うことができる。 The receiving unit may receive a connection request message including authentication information of the user device as the first context holding information from the user device. With this configuration, it is possible to authenticate the user device by receiving the authentication information before the connection setting is performed (before the RRC connection is made).
 前記送信手段は、前記ユーザ装置側コンテクスト情報をアクティブ化する指示情報を前記第2コンテクスト保持情報として含む接続設定メッセージを、前記ユーザ装置に送信することとしてもよい。この構成により、ユーザ装置は、ユーザ装置側コンテクスト情報をアクティブ化する指示情報を受信するか否かにより、基地局がコンテクスト情報を保持しているか否かを判断できる。 The transmitting unit may transmit a connection setting message including instruction information for activating the user apparatus side context information as the second context holding information to the user apparatus. With this configuration, the user apparatus can determine whether or not the base station holds the context information based on whether or not the instruction information for activating the user apparatus side context information is received.
 前記送信手段は、前記ユーザ装置を接続状態からアイドル状態に遷移させる接続解放メッセージの中に、前記ユーザ装置側コンテクスト情報を保持することを指示する情報を含め、当該接続解放メッセージを前記ユーザ装置に送信することとしてもよい。この構成により、ユーザ装置は、指示を受けない場合には、ユーザ装置側コンテクスト情報を保持しなくてもよく、無駄にユーザ装置側コンテクスト情報を保持することを回避できる。 The transmission means includes, in a connection release message for transitioning the user device from a connected state to an idle state, information instructing to hold the user device side context information, and sends the connection release message to the user device. It is good also as transmitting. With this configuration, when the user device does not receive an instruction, the user device does not need to hold the user device-side context information, and can avoid holding the user device-side context information unnecessarily.
 また、本実施の形態により、ユーザ装置と基地局のそれぞれに保持されるコンテクスト情報を再利用して接続確立を行う機能をサポートする移動通信システムにおける前記基地局であって、ユーザ装置側コンテクスト情報を保持する前記ユーザ装置から第1識別子を含む接続要求メッセージを受信する受信手段と、第2識別子の要求が含まれた接続設定メッセージを前記ユーザ装置に送信する送信手段と、前記ユーザ装置から前記第2識別子を含む接続設定完了メッセージを受信し、当該第2識別子に基づいて前記ユーザ装置の基地局側コンテクスト情報を保持する保持基地局を特定し、当該保持基地局に対して、コンテクスト要求メッセージを送信し、当該コンテクスト要求メッセージに応じて前記保持基地局から送信される前記基地局側コンテクスト情報を取得するコンテクスト取得手段とを備える基地局が提供される。 また、本実施の形態により、ユーザ装置と基地局のそれぞれに保持されるコンテクスト情報を再利用して接続確立を行う機能をサポートする移動通信システムにおける前記ユーザ装置であって、前記基地局から、当該基地局がコンテクスト保持機能を有するか否かを示す指示情報を受信する受信手段と、前記受信手段により受信した前記指示情報に基づき、前記基地局がコンテクスト保持機能を有するか否かを判定する判定手段と、前記判定手段により、前記基地局がコンテクスト保持機能を有すると判定される場合に、前記ユーザ装置がユーザ装置側コンテクスト情報を保持していることを示すコンテクスト保持情報を含むメッセージを、前記基地局に送信する送信手段とを備えるユーザ装置が提供される。 Further, according to the present embodiment, the base station in the mobile communication system that supports the function of establishing the connection by reusing the context information held in each of the user apparatus and the base station, the user apparatus side context information Receiving means for receiving a connection request message including a first identifier from the user apparatus holding the terminal, transmitting means for transmitting a connection setting message including a request for a second identifier to the user apparatus, and from the user apparatus A connection setting completion message including a second identifier is received, a holding base station holding the base station side context information of the user apparatus is specified based on the second identifier, and a context request message is sent to the holding base station The base station transmitted from the holding base station in response to the context request message Base station is provided and a context acquisition means for acquiring context information. Further, according to the present embodiment, the user apparatus in the mobile communication system that supports the function of establishing connection by reusing the context information held in each of the user apparatus and the base station, from the base station, A receiving unit that receives instruction information indicating whether or not the base station has a context holding function, and determines whether the base station has a context holding function based on the instruction information received by the receiving unit When the determination unit and the determination unit determine that the base station has a context holding function, a message including context holding information indicating that the user apparatus holds user apparatus side context information. There is provided a user apparatus comprising transmission means for transmitting to the base station.
 上記の構成により、ユーザ装置と基地局のそれぞれに保持されるコンテクスト情報を再利用して接続確立を行う機能をサポートする移動通信システムにおいて、基地局がコンテクスト情報を再利用する機能を保持するか否かをユーザ装置により判定することが可能となる。 Whether the base station retains the function of reusing context information in a mobile communication system that supports the function of reestablishing a connection by reusing context information retained in each of the user apparatus and the base station with the above configuration It becomes possible to determine whether or not by the user device.
 前記受信手段は、例えば、報知情報又はランダムアクセスレスポンスに含まれる前記指示情報を受信する。この構成により、新規な信号を導入することなくユーザ装置は指示信号を受信できる。 The receiving means receives, for example, the instruction information included in broadcast information or a random access response. With this configuration, the user apparatus can receive the instruction signal without introducing a new signal.
 前記送信手段は、前記コンテクスト保持情報を含む接続要求メッセージを前記基地局に送信することとしてもよい。この構成により、コンテクスト情報を再利用する機能を保持することが確認された基地局に接続要求メッセージを送信でき、コンテクスト情報を再利用した接続確立を確実に行うことができる。 The transmission unit may transmit a connection request message including the context holding information to the base station. With this configuration, it is possible to transmit a connection request message to a base station that has been confirmed to have a function of reusing context information, and to reliably establish a connection by reusing context information.
 また、本実施の形態により、ユーザ装置と基地局のそれぞれに保持されるコンテクスト情報を再利用して接続確立を行う機能をサポートする移動通信システムにおける前記ユーザ装置であって、前記ユーザ装置がユーザ装置側コンテクスト情報を保持していることを示す第1コンテクスト保持情報を含む接続要求メッセージを、前記基地局に送信する送信手段と、前記基地局から受信する接続設定メッセージの中に、前記基地局が前記ユーザ装置に対応付けられた基地局側コンテクスト情報を保持していることを示す第2コンテクスト保持情報が含まれているか否かを判定する判定手段と、前記判定手段により、前記接続設定メッセージの中に第2コンテクスト保持情報が含まれていると判定される場合に、前記ユーザ装置側コンテクスト情報を利用して、前記基地局との間で接続を確立する接続手段とを備えるユーザ装置が提供される。 Further, according to the present embodiment, the user apparatus in the mobile communication system that supports a function of establishing connection by reusing context information held in each of the user apparatus and the base station, wherein the user apparatus is a user In the connection setting message received from the base station, a connection request message including first context holding information indicating that the apparatus side context information is held is transmitted to the base station. Determining whether or not second context holding information indicating that base station side context information associated with the user apparatus is held is included, and the determination means includes the connection setting message. When it is determined that the second context holding information is included in the user device side context, Using the multicast, a user device and a connection means for establishing a connection between said base station is provided.
 上記の構成により、ユーザ装置と基地局のそれぞれに保持されるコンテクスト情報を再利用して接続確立を行う機能をサポートする移動通信システムにおいて、基地局がコンテクスト情報を再利用する機能を保持するか否かをユーザ装置により判定することが可能となる。 Whether the base station retains the function of reusing context information in a mobile communication system that supports the function of reestablishing a connection by reusing context information retained in each of the user apparatus and the base station with the above configuration It becomes possible to determine whether or not by the user device.
 また、本実施の形態により、ユーザ装置と基地局のそれぞれに保持されるコンテクスト情報を再利用して接続確立を行う機能をサポートする移動通信システムにおける前記基地局であって、前記基地局がコンテクスト保持機能を有するか否かを示す指示情報を、前記ユーザ装置に送信する送信手段と、前記ユーザ装置において、前記指示情報に基づき、前記基地局がコンテクスト保持機能を有すると判定される場合に、前記ユーザ装置がユーザ装置側コンテクスト情報を保持していることを示すコンテクスト保持情報を含むメッセージを、前記ユーザ装置から受信する受信手段とを備える基地局が提供される。 Further, according to the present embodiment, the base station in the mobile communication system that supports the function of establishing the connection by reusing the context information held in each of the user apparatus and the base station, the base station In the case where it is determined that the base station has a context holding function based on the instruction information in the transmission unit that transmits instruction information indicating whether or not to have a holding function to the user device, and the user device, There is provided a base station comprising receiving means for receiving, from the user apparatus, a message including context holding information indicating that the user apparatus holds user apparatus side context information.
 上記の構成により、ユーザ装置と基地局のそれぞれに保持されるコンテクスト情報を再利用して接続確立を行う機能をサポートする移動通信システムにおいて、基地局がコンテクスト情報を再利用する機能を保持するか否かをユーザ装置により判定することが可能となる。 Whether the base station retains the function of reusing context information in a mobile communication system that supports the function of reestablishing a connection by reusing context information retained in each of the user apparatus and the base station with the above configuration It becomes possible to determine whether or not by the user device.
 前記送信手段は、例えば、前記指示情報を含む報知情報又はランダムアクセスレスポンスを前記ユーザ装置に送信する。この構成により、新規な信号を導入することなくユーザ装置は指示信号を受信できる。 The transmission means transmits, for example, broadcast information including the instruction information or a random access response to the user device. With this configuration, the user apparatus can receive the instruction signal without introducing a new signal.
 前記受信手段は、前記コンテクスト保持情報を含む接続要求メッセージを前記ユーザ装置から受信することとしてもよい。この構成により、コンテクスト情報を再利用する機能を保持することが確認された基地局が接続要求メッセージを受信でき、コンテクスト情報を再利用した接続確立を確実に行うことができる。 The receiving unit may receive a connection request message including the context holding information from the user device. With this configuration, a base station that has been confirmed to have a function of reusing context information can receive a connection request message, and a connection can be reliably established by reusing context information.
 なお、上記の各装置の構成における「手段」を、「部」、「回路」、「デバイス」等に置き換えてもよい。 It should be noted that the “means” in the configuration of each device described above may be replaced with “unit”, “circuit”, “device”, and the like.
 (付記)
 以上説明した実施の形態に関し、更に以下の付記のようにも記載できる。
[付記1]
 ユーザ装置と基地局のそれぞれに保持されるコンテクスト情報を再利用して接続確立を行う機能をサポートする移動通信システムにおける前記ユーザ装置であって、
 前記ユーザ装置がユーザ装置側コンテクスト情報を保持していることを示す第1コンテクスト保持情報を含む接続要求メッセージを、前記基地局に送信する送信手段と、
 前記基地局が前記ユーザ装置に対応付けられた基地局側コンテクスト情報を保持していることを示す第2コンテクスト保持情報を含む接続設定メッセージを、前記基地局から受信する受信手段と、
 前記接続設定メッセージを受信した後、前記ユーザ装置側コンテクスト情報を利用して、前記基地局との間で接続を確立する接続手段と
 を備えることを特徴とするユーザ装置。
[付記2]
 前記接続設定メッセージは、前記第2コンテクスト保持情報に加えて、前記ユーザ装置に対する認証情報の送信要求を含み、前記送信手段は、当該送信要求に基づいて、認証情報を前記基地局に送信する
 ことを特徴とする付記1に記載のユーザ装置。
[付記3]
 前記送信手段は、前記認証情報を含む接続設定完了メッセージを前記基地局に送信する
 ことを特徴とする付記2に記載のユーザ装置。
[付記4]
 前記送信手段は、前記ユーザ装置の認証情報を前記第1コンテクスト保持情報として含む接続要求メッセージを、前記基地局に送信する
 ことを特徴とする付記1に記載のユーザ装置。
[付記5]
 前記受信手段は、前記ユーザ装置側コンテクスト情報をアクティブ化する指示情報を前記第2コンテクスト保持情報として含む接続設定メッセージを、前記基地局から受信する
 ことを特徴とする付記1に記載のユーザ装置。
[付記6]
 前記受信手段は、前記ユーザ装置を接続状態からアイドル状態に遷移させる接続解放メッセージを前記基地局から受信し、当該接続解放メッセージの中から、前記ユーザ装置側コンテクスト情報を保持することを指示する情報を検知した場合に、前記アイドル状態の間、前記ユーザ装置側コンテクスト情報を記憶手段に保持する
 ことを特徴とする付記1ないし5のうちいずれか1項に記載のユーザ装置。
[付記7]
 前記ユーザ装置が接続状態からアイドル状態に遷移した時点から、アイドル状態のまま所定の時間が経過した場合に、前記記憶手段に保持された前記ユーザ装置側コンテクスト情報を無効とする管理手段
 を備えることを特徴とする付記6に記載のユーザ装置。
[付記8]
 前記ユーザ装置が接続状態からアイドル状態に遷移した場合に、再度接続状態に遷移するために選択するセルの無線アクセス技術に応じて、前記記憶手段に保持された前記ユーザ装置側コンテクスト情報を無効とするか否かを選択する管理手段
 を備えることを特徴とする付記6又は7に記載のユーザ装置。
[付記9]
 ユーザ装置と基地局のそれぞれに保持されるコンテクスト情報を再利用して接続確立を行う機能をサポートする移動通信システムにおける前記基地局であって、
 前記ユーザ装置がユーザ装置側コンテクスト情報を保持していることを示す第1コンテクスト保持情報を含む接続要求メッセージを、前記ユーザ装置から受信する受信手段と、
 前記接続要求メッセージを受信したことに応じて、前記基地局が前記ユーザ装置に対応付けられた基地局側コンテクスト情報を保持していることを示す第2コンテクスト保持情報を含む接続設定メッセージを、前記ユーザ装置に送信する送信手段と、
 前記接続設定メッセージを送信した後、前記基地局側コンテクスト情報を利用して、前記ユーザ装置との間で接続を確立する接続手段と
 を備えることを特徴とする基地局。
[付記10]
 前記受信手段は、前記接続要求メッセージから前記ユーザ装置の識別子を取得し、保持される複数の基地局側コンテクスト情報から、当該識別子に対応する基地局側コンテクスト情報を検索する
 ことを特徴とする付記9に記載の基地局。
[付記11]
 前記接続設定メッセージは、前記第2コンテクスト保持情報に加えて、前記ユーザ装置に対する認証情報の送信要求を含み、
 前記送信要求に基づいて、前記ユーザ装置から送信された認証情報を用いて前記ユーザ装置の認証を行う認証手段
 を備えることを特徴とする付記9又は10に記載の基地局。
[付記12]
 前記受信手段は、前記ユーザ装置の認証情報を前記第1コンテクスト保持情報として含む接続要求メッセージを、前記ユーザ装置から受信する
 ことを特徴とする付記9に記載の基地局。
[付記13]
 前記送信手段は、前記ユーザ装置側コンテクスト情報をアクティブ化する指示情報を前記第2コンテクスト保持情報として含む接続設定メッセージを、前記ユーザ装置に送信する
 ことを特徴とする付記9に記載の基地局。
[付記14]
 前記送信手段は、前記ユーザ装置を接続状態からアイドル状態に遷移させる接続解放メッセージの中に、前記ユーザ装置側コンテクスト情報を保持することを指示する情報を含め、当該接続解放メッセージを前記ユーザ装置に送信する
 ことを特徴とする付記9ないし13のうちいずれか1項に記載の基地局。
[付記15]
 ユーザ装置と基地局のそれぞれに保持されるコンテクスト情報を再利用して接続確立を行う機能をサポートする移動通信システムにおける前記ユーザ装置が実行する接続確立方法であって、
 前記ユーザ装置がユーザ装置側コンテクスト情報を保持していることを示す第1コンテクスト保持情報を含む接続要求メッセージを、前記基地局に送信する送信ステップと、
 前記基地局が前記ユーザ装置に対応付けられた基地局側コンテクスト情報を保持していることを示す第2コンテクスト保持情報を含む接続設定メッセージを、前記基地局から受信する受信ステップと、
 前記接続設定メッセージを受信した後、前記ユーザ装置側コンテクスト情報を利用して、前記基地局との間で接続を確立する接続ステップと
 を備えることを特徴とする接続確立方法。
[付記16]
 ユーザ装置と基地局のそれぞれに保持されるコンテクスト情報を再利用して接続確立を行う機能をサポートする移動通信システムにおける前記基地局が実行する接続確立方法であって、
 前記ユーザ装置がユーザ装置側コンテクスト情報を保持していることを示す第1コンテクスト保持情報を含む接続要求メッセージを、前記ユーザ装置から受信する受信ステップと、
 前記接続要求メッセージを受信したことに応じて、前記基地局が前記ユーザ装置に対応付けられた基地局側コンテクスト情報を保持していることを示す第2コンテクスト保持情報を含む接続設定メッセージを、前記ユーザ装置に送信する送信ステップと、
 前記接続設定メッセージを送信した後、前記基地局側コンテクスト情報を利用して、前記ユーザ装置との間で接続を確立する接続ステップと
 を備えることを特徴とする接続確立方法。
(Appendix)
The embodiment described above can be further described as the following supplementary notes.
[Appendix 1]
The user apparatus in a mobile communication system that supports a function of establishing connection by reusing context information held in each of a user apparatus and a base station,
Transmitting means for transmitting to the base station a connection request message including first context holding information indicating that the user apparatus holds user apparatus side context information;
Receiving means for receiving, from the base station, a connection setting message including second context holding information indicating that the base station holds base station side context information associated with the user apparatus;
A user apparatus comprising: a connection unit that establishes a connection with the base station using the context information on the user apparatus side after receiving the connection setting message.
[Appendix 2]
The connection setting message includes a request for transmitting authentication information to the user apparatus in addition to the second context holding information, and the transmission means transmits authentication information to the base station based on the transmission request. The user apparatus according to appendix 1, characterized by:
[Appendix 3]
The user apparatus according to supplementary note 2, wherein the transmission unit transmits a connection setting completion message including the authentication information to the base station.
[Appendix 4]
The user apparatus according to appendix 1, wherein the transmission unit transmits a connection request message including authentication information of the user apparatus as the first context holding information to the base station.
[Appendix 5]
The user apparatus according to appendix 1, wherein the reception unit receives a connection setting message including instruction information for activating the user apparatus side context information as the second context holding information from the base station.
[Appendix 6]
The receiving means receives from the base station a connection release message that causes the user apparatus to transition from a connected state to an idle state, and instructs to hold the user apparatus side context information from the connection release message The user device according to any one of appendices 1 to 5, wherein the user device-side context information is held in a storage unit during the idle state.
[Appendix 7]
Management means for invalidating the user device side context information held in the storage means when a predetermined time has passed in the idle state since the time when the user device transitioned from the connected state to the idle state. The user device according to appendix 6, characterized by:
[Appendix 8]
When the user apparatus transitions from the connected state to the idle state, the user apparatus side context information held in the storage unit is invalidated according to the radio access technology of the cell selected to transition to the connected state again. The user apparatus according to appendix 6 or 7, further comprising management means for selecting whether or not to perform.
[Appendix 9]
The base station in a mobile communication system that supports a function of establishing a connection by reusing context information held in each of a user apparatus and a base station,
Receiving means for receiving, from the user device, a connection request message including first context holding information indicating that the user device holds user device side context information;
In response to receiving the connection request message, a connection setting message including second context holding information indicating that the base station holds base station side context information associated with the user apparatus, Transmitting means for transmitting to the user device;
A base station comprising: connection means for establishing a connection with the user apparatus using the base station side context information after transmitting the connection setting message.
[Appendix 10]
The receiving means acquires an identifier of the user apparatus from the connection request message, and searches base station side context information corresponding to the identifier from a plurality of base station side context information held. 9. A base station according to 9.
[Appendix 11]
The connection setting message includes a request for transmitting authentication information to the user device in addition to the second context holding information,
The base station according to appendix 9 or 10, further comprising: an authenticating unit that authenticates the user device using authentication information transmitted from the user device based on the transmission request.
[Appendix 12]
The base station according to appendix 9, wherein the receiving unit receives a connection request message including authentication information of the user device as the first context holding information from the user device.
[Appendix 13]
The base station according to appendix 9, wherein the transmission means transmits a connection setting message including instruction information for activating the user apparatus side context information as the second context holding information to the user apparatus.
[Appendix 14]
The transmission means includes, in a connection release message for transitioning the user device from a connected state to an idle state, information instructing to hold the user device side context information, and sends the connection release message to the user device. The base station according to any one of appendices 9 to 13, wherein the base station transmits.
[Appendix 15]
A connection establishment method executed by the user apparatus in a mobile communication system that supports a function of establishing connection by reusing context information held in each of a user apparatus and a base station,
A transmission step of transmitting, to the base station, a connection request message including first context holding information indicating that the user apparatus holds user apparatus side context information;
A reception step of receiving from the base station a connection setting message including second context holding information indicating that the base station holds base station side context information associated with the user apparatus;
A connection establishment method comprising: a connection step of establishing a connection with the base station using the user apparatus side context information after receiving the connection setting message.
[Appendix 16]
A connection establishment method executed by the base station in a mobile communication system that supports a function of establishing connection by reusing context information held in each of a user apparatus and a base station,
Receiving a connection request message including first context holding information indicating that the user device holds user device side context information from the user device;
In response to receiving the connection request message, a connection setting message including second context holding information indicating that the base station holds base station side context information associated with the user apparatus, A transmitting step for transmitting to the user device;
A connection establishing method comprising: a connection step of establishing a connection with the user apparatus using the base station side context information after transmitting the connection setting message.
 以上、本発明の実施の形態を説明してきたが、開示される発明はそのような実施形態に限定されず、当業者は様々な変形例、修正例、代替例、置換例等を理解するであろう。発明の理解を促すため具体的な数値例を用いて説明がなされたが、特に断りのない限り、それらの数値は単なる一例に過ぎず適切な如何なる値が使用されてもよい。上記の説明における項目の区分けは本発明に本質的ではなく、2以上の項目に記載された事項が必要に応じて組み合わせて使用されてよいし、ある項目に記載された事項が、別の項目に記載された事項に(矛盾しない限り)適用されてよい。機能ブロック図における機能部又は処理部の境界は必ずしも物理的な部品の境界に対応するとは限らない。複数の機能部の動作が物理的には1つの部品で行われてもよいし、あるいは1つの機能部の動作が物理的には複数の部品により行われてもよい。説明の便宜上、各装置は機能的なブロック図を用いて説明されたが、そのような装置はハードウェアで、ソフトウェアで又はそれらの組み合わせで実現されてもよい。本発明の実施の形態に従って当該装置が有するプロセッサにより動作するソフトウェアは、ランダムアクセスメモリ(RAM)、フラッシュメモリ、読み取り専用メモリ(ROM)、EPROM、EEPROM、レジスタ、ハードディスク(HDD)、リムーバブルディスク、CD-ROM、データベース、サーバその他の適切な如何なる記憶媒体に保存されてもよい。 Although the embodiments of the present invention have been described above, the disclosed invention is not limited to such embodiments, and those skilled in the art will understand various variations, modifications, alternatives, substitutions, and the like. I will. Although specific numerical examples have been described in order to facilitate understanding of the invention, these numerical values are merely examples and any appropriate values may be used unless otherwise specified. The classification of items in the above description is not essential to the present invention, and the items described in two or more items may be used in combination as necessary, or the items described in one item may be used in different items. It may be applied to the matters described in (if not inconsistent). The boundaries between functional units or processing units in the functional block diagram do not necessarily correspond to physical component boundaries. The operations of a plurality of functional units may be physically performed by one component, or the operations of one functional unit may be physically performed by a plurality of components. For convenience of description, each device has been described using a functional block diagram. However, such a device may be implemented in hardware, software, or a combination thereof. Software that is operated by the processor of the apparatus according to the embodiment of the present invention includes random access memory (RAM), flash memory, read only memory (ROM), EPROM, EEPROM, register, hard disk (HDD), removable disk, CD It may be stored in any suitable storage medium such as ROM, database, server, etc.
 本発明は上記実施形態に限定されず、本発明の精神から逸脱することなく、様々な変形例、修正例、代替例、置換例等が本発明に包含される。 The present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiment, and various variations, modifications, alternatives, substitutions, and the like are included in the present invention without departing from the spirit of the present invention.
 本特許出願は2015年11月5日に出願した日本国特許出願第2015-218014号、2016年1月7日に出願した日本国特許出願第2016-002129号、2016年2月4日に出願した日本国特許出願第2016-020321号、2016年3月9日に出願した日本国特許出願第2016-046348号、2016年8月4日に出願した日本国特許出願第2016-153979号、及び2016年8月25日に出願した日本国特許出願第2016-165170号に基づきその優先権を主張するものであり、日本国特許出願第2015-218014号、日本国特許出願第2016-002129号、日本国特許出願第2016-020321号、日本国特許出願第2016-046348号、日本国特許出願第2016-153979号、及び日本国特許出願第2016-165170号の全内容を本願に援用する。 This patent application is Japanese Patent Application No. 2015-218014 filed on November 5, 2015, Japanese Patent Application No. 2016-002129 filed on January 7, 2016, and filed February 4, 2016. Japanese Patent Application No. 2016-020321, Japanese Patent Application No. 2016-046348 filed on March 9, 2016, Japanese Patent Application No. 2016-153799 filed on August 4, 2016, and The priority is claimed based on Japanese Patent Application No. 2016-165170 filed on August 25, 2016, including Japanese Patent Application No. 2015-2182014, Japanese Patent Application No. 2016-002129, Japanese Patent Application No. 2016-020321, Japanese Patent Application No. 2016-046348, Japanese Patent Application No. 2 No. 16-153979, and the entire contents of Japanese Patent Application No. 2016-165170 incorporated herein by reference.
10、20 eNB
11 DL信号送信部
12 UL信号受信部
13 RRC処理部
14 UEコンテクスト管理部
15 認証部
16 NW通信部
17 UEコンテクスト取得部
30 MME
31 eNB通信部
32 SGW通信部
33 通信制御部
40 S-GW
41 eNB通信部
42 MME通信部
43 NW通信部
44 通信制御部
50 UE
51 DL信号受信部
52 UL信号送信部
53 RRC処理部
54 UEコンテクスト管理部
151 REモジュール
152 BB処理モジュール
153 装置制御モジュール
154 USIMスロット
251 REモジュール
252 BB処理モジュール
253 装置制御モジュール
254 通信IF
10, 20 eNB
11 DL signal transmission unit 12 UL signal reception unit 13 RRC processing unit 14 UE context management unit 15 Authentication unit 16 NW communication unit 17 UE context acquisition unit 30 MME
31 eNB communication unit 32 SGW communication unit 33 communication control unit 40 S-GW
41 eNB communication unit 42 MME communication unit 43 NW communication unit 44 communication control unit 50 UE
51 DL signal reception unit 52 UL signal transmission unit 53 RRC processing unit 54 UE context management unit 151 RE module 152 BB processing module 153 device control module 154 USIM slot 251 RE module 252 BB processing module 253 device control module 254 Communication IF

Claims (11)

  1.  ユーザ装置と基地局のそれぞれに保持されるコンテクスト情報を再利用して接続確立を行う機能をサポートする移動通信システムにおける前記ユーザ装置であって、
     前記ユーザ装置がユーザ装置側コンテクスト情報を保持していることを示す第1のメッセージを、前記基地局に送信する送信手段と、
     前記基地局が前記ユーザ装置に対応付けられた基地局側コンテクスト情報を保持していることを示す第2のメッセージを、前記基地局から受信する受信手段と、
     前記第2のメッセージを受信した後、前記ユーザ装置側コンテクスト情報を利用して、前記基地局との間で接続を確立する接続手段と
     を備えることを特徴とするユーザ装置。
    The user apparatus in a mobile communication system that supports a function of establishing connection by reusing context information held in each of a user apparatus and a base station,
    Transmitting means for transmitting to the base station a first message indicating that the user apparatus holds user apparatus side context information;
    Receiving means for receiving, from the base station, a second message indicating that the base station holds the base station side context information associated with the user apparatus;
    A user apparatus comprising: a connection unit that establishes a connection with the base station by using the user apparatus side context information after receiving the second message.
  2.  前記送信手段は、前記ユーザ装置の認証情報を含む前記第1のメッセージを、前記基地局に送信する
     ことを特徴とする請求項1に記載のユーザ装置。
    The user apparatus according to claim 1, wherein the transmitting unit transmits the first message including authentication information of the user apparatus to the base station.
  3.  前記受信手段は、前記ユーザ装置を接続状態からアイドル状態に遷移させる接続解放メッセージを前記基地局から受信し、当該接続解放メッセージの中から、前記ユーザ装置側コンテクスト情報を保持することを指示する情報を検知した場合に、前記アイドル状態の間、前記ユーザ装置側コンテクスト情報を記憶手段に保持する
     ことを特徴とする請求項1又は2に記載のユーザ装置。
    The receiving means receives from the base station a connection release message that causes the user apparatus to transition from a connected state to an idle state, and instructs to hold the user apparatus side context information from the connection release message 3. The user apparatus according to claim 1, wherein the user apparatus-side context information is held in a storage unit during the idle state when the user apparatus is detected.
  4.  前記ユーザ装置が接続状態からアイドル状態に遷移した時点から、アイドル状態のまま所定の時間が経過した場合に、前記記憶手段に保持された前記ユーザ装置側コンテクスト情報を無効とする管理手段
     を備えることを特徴とする請求項3に記載のユーザ装置。
    Management means for invalidating the user device side context information held in the storage means when a predetermined time has passed in the idle state since the time when the user device transitioned from the connected state to the idle state. The user apparatus according to claim 3.
  5.  前記ユーザ装置が再選択するセルがLTE以外の他のRATである場合、前記記憶手段に保持された前記ユーザ装置側コンテクスト情報を解放する管理手段
     を備えることを特徴とする請求項3又は4に記載のユーザ装置。
    5. The management device for releasing the user device side context information held in the storage unit when the cell reselected by the user device is a RAT other than LTE. The user device described.
  6.  ユーザ装置と基地局のそれぞれに保持されるコンテクスト情報を再利用して接続確立を行う機能をサポートする移動通信システムにおける前記基地局であって、
     前記ユーザ装置がユーザ装置側コンテクスト情報を保持していることを示す第1のメッセージを、前記ユーザ装置から受信する受信手段と、
     前記第1のメッセージを受信したことに応じて、前記基地局が前記ユーザ装置に対応付けられた基地局側コンテクスト情報を保持していることを示す第2のメッセージを、前記ユーザ装置に送信する送信手段と、
     前記第2のメッセージを送信した後、前記基地局側コンテクスト情報を利用して、前記ユーザ装置との間で接続を確立する接続手段と
     を備えることを特徴とする基地局。
    The base station in a mobile communication system that supports a function of establishing a connection by reusing context information held in each of a user apparatus and a base station,
    Receiving means for receiving, from the user device, a first message indicating that the user device holds user device-side context information;
    In response to receiving the first message, a second message indicating that the base station holds the base station side context information associated with the user apparatus is transmitted to the user apparatus. A transmission means;
    A base station comprising: connection means for establishing a connection with the user apparatus using the base station side context information after transmitting the second message.
  7.  前記受信手段は、前記第1のメッセージから前記ユーザ装置の識別子を取得し、保持される複数の基地局側コンテクスト情報から、当該識別子に対応する基地局側コンテクスト情報を検索する
     ことを特徴とする請求項6に記載の基地局。
    The reception unit acquires an identifier of the user apparatus from the first message, and searches base station side context information corresponding to the identifier from a plurality of retained base station side context information. The base station according to claim 6.
  8.  前記受信手段は、前記ユーザ装置の認証情報を含む前記第1のメッセージを、前記ユーザ装置から受信する
     ことを特徴とする請求項6又は7に記載の基地局。
    The base station according to claim 6 or 7, wherein the reception unit receives the first message including authentication information of the user device from the user device.
  9.  前記送信手段は、前記ユーザ装置を接続状態からアイドル状態に遷移させる接続解放メッセージの中に、前記ユーザ装置側コンテクスト情報を保持することを指示する情報を含め、当該接続解放メッセージを前記ユーザ装置に送信する
     ことを特徴とする請求項6ないし8のうちいずれか1項に記載の基地局。
    The transmission means includes, in a connection release message for transitioning the user device from a connected state to an idle state, information instructing to hold the user device side context information, and sends the connection release message to the user device. The base station according to any one of claims 6 to 8, wherein the base station transmits.
  10.  ユーザ装置と基地局のそれぞれに保持されるコンテクスト情報を再利用して接続確立を行う機能をサポートする移動通信システムにおける前記ユーザ装置が実行する接続確立方法であって、
     前記ユーザ装置がユーザ装置側コンテクスト情報を保持していることを示す第1のメッセージを、前記基地局に送信する送信ステップと、
     前記基地局が前記ユーザ装置に対応付けられた基地局側コンテクスト情報を保持していることを示す第2のメッセージを、前記基地局から受信する受信ステップと、
     前記第2のメッセージを受信した後、前記ユーザ装置側コンテクスト情報を利用して、前記基地局との間で接続を確立する接続ステップと
     を備えることを特徴とする接続確立方法。
    A connection establishment method executed by the user apparatus in a mobile communication system that supports a function of establishing connection by reusing context information held in each of a user apparatus and a base station,
    A transmission step of transmitting to the base station a first message indicating that the user apparatus holds user apparatus side context information;
    A receiving step of receiving, from the base station, a second message indicating that the base station holds the base station side context information associated with the user device;
    A connection establishing method for establishing a connection with the base station by using the user apparatus side context information after receiving the second message.
  11.  ユーザ装置と基地局のそれぞれに保持されるコンテクスト情報を再利用して接続確立を行う機能をサポートする移動通信システムにおける前記基地局が実行する接続確立方法であって、
     前記ユーザ装置がユーザ装置側コンテクスト情報を保持していることを示す第1のメッセージを、前記ユーザ装置から受信する受信ステップと、
     前記第1のメッセージを受信したことに応じて、前記基地局が前記ユーザ装置に対応付けられた基地局側コンテクスト情報を保持していることを示す第2のメッセージを、前記ユーザ装置に送信する送信ステップと、
     前記第2のメッセージを送信した後、前記基地局側コンテクスト情報を利用して、前記ユーザ装置との間で接続を確立する接続ステップと
     を備えることを特徴とする接続確立方法。
    A connection establishment method executed by the base station in a mobile communication system that supports a function of establishing connection by reusing context information held in each of a user apparatus and a base station,
    A receiving step of receiving, from the user device, a first message indicating that the user device holds user device-side context information;
    In response to receiving the first message, a second message indicating that the base station holds the base station side context information associated with the user apparatus is transmitted to the user apparatus. Sending step;
    A connection establishing method comprising: establishing a connection with the user apparatus using the base station side context information after transmitting the second message.
PCT/JP2016/082273 2015-11-05 2016-10-31 User device, base station, and connection establishment method WO2017077979A1 (en)

Priority Applications (4)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
US15/544,566 US10448290B2 (en) 2015-11-05 2016-10-31 User equipment, base station, and connection establishment method
EP16862039.1A EP3373692B1 (en) 2015-11-05 2016-10-31 User device, base station, and connection establishment method
CN201680011221.6A CN107251642B (en) 2015-11-05 2016-10-31 User device, base station, and connection establishment method
PH12017501236A PH12017501236A1 (en) 2015-11-05 2017-07-04 User equipment, base station, and connection establishment method

Applications Claiming Priority (12)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
JP2015218014 2015-11-05
JP2015-218014 2015-11-05
JP2016-002129 2016-01-07
JP2016002129 2016-01-07
JP2016020321 2016-02-04
JP2016-020321 2016-02-04
JP2016046348 2016-03-09
JP2016-046348 2016-03-09
JP2016153979 2016-08-04
JP2016-153979 2016-08-04
JP2016165170A JP6123009B1 (en) 2015-11-05 2016-08-25 User apparatus, base station, and connection establishment method
JP2016-165170 2016-08-25

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2017077979A1 true WO2017077979A1 (en) 2017-05-11

Family

ID=58663034

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/JP2016/082273 WO2017077979A1 (en) 2015-11-05 2016-10-31 User device, base station, and connection establishment method

Country Status (1)

Country Link
WO (1) WO2017077979A1 (en)

Cited By (2)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN113556703A (en) * 2020-04-03 2021-10-26 华为技术有限公司 Wireless communication method and communication device
CN113825186A (en) * 2020-06-19 2021-12-21 维沃移动通信有限公司 Control method and device for leaving network and communication equipment

Citations (3)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US20080242292A1 (en) * 2007-01-15 2008-10-02 Nokia Corporation Method and apparatus for providing context recovery
WO2014183833A1 (en) * 2013-05-15 2014-11-20 Alcatel Lucent Network nodes and methods
WO2015114695A1 (en) * 2014-01-30 2015-08-06 日本電気株式会社 Base station, machine-to-machine (m2m) terminal, method, and computer-readable medium

Patent Citations (3)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US20080242292A1 (en) * 2007-01-15 2008-10-02 Nokia Corporation Method and apparatus for providing context recovery
WO2014183833A1 (en) * 2013-05-15 2014-11-20 Alcatel Lucent Network nodes and methods
WO2015114695A1 (en) * 2014-01-30 2015-08-06 日本電気株式会社 Base station, machine-to-machine (m2m) terminal, method, and computer-readable medium

Non-Patent Citations (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Title
NTT DOCOMO, INC.: "Work on user plane based solution with AS information stored in RAN", 3GPP TSG-RAN WG2#92, R2-156424, 3GPP, XP051005843 *

Cited By (3)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN113556703A (en) * 2020-04-03 2021-10-26 华为技术有限公司 Wireless communication method and communication device
CN113825186A (en) * 2020-06-19 2021-12-21 维沃移动通信有限公司 Control method and device for leaving network and communication equipment
CN113825186B (en) * 2020-06-19 2023-08-01 维沃移动通信有限公司 Control method, device and communication equipment for leaving network

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
JP6123009B1 (en) User apparatus, base station, and connection establishment method
JP6208296B1 (en) User apparatus, base station, and connection establishment method
JP6991859B2 (en) Terminals, base stations, and mobile communication systems
JP6144369B1 (en) Base station and context information holding method
US9955419B2 (en) Network nodes, a user equipment and methods therein for establishing a connection between the user equipment and a wireless communications network
WO2016123809A1 (en) Signaling optimization method and device
CN113475109B (en) Early measurement reporting with RRC resume complete like message
JP7025386B2 (en) User device and random access method
WO2018126961A1 (en) Communication method, access network device, and terminal
EP2712262B1 (en) Network attach method and apparatus thereof for relay node
US20170202051A1 (en) Method and apparatus for reusing access stratum context through unique base station identifier, and method and apparatus for resuming radio resource control (rrc) connection by using the same
WO2018214708A1 (en) Communication method and apparatus
WO2017078140A1 (en) User device, base station, and connection establishment method
WO2017077979A1 (en) User device, base station, and connection establishment method
EP4005334B1 (en) Systems and methods for handling a radio resource control inactive state
EP3579655B1 (en) Connection release method and system, and computer readable storage medium
WO2017150601A1 (en) User device and random access method
WO2020019329A1 (en) Paging message processing method and apparatus
WO2022236631A1 (en) Method and apparatus for ue-to-network relay handover
CN112005614A (en) TA update in RRC _ INACTIVE state

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 16862039

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1

WWE Wipo information: entry into national phase

Ref document number: 12017501236

Country of ref document: PH

REEP Request for entry into the european phase

Ref document number: 2016862039

Country of ref document: EP

WWE Wipo information: entry into national phase

Ref document number: 15544566

Country of ref document: US

NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: DE